C Apacme 2012

In the Specs On the Job At Your Service
Anchoring
and Fastening
Systems
C-APACME-2012
Adhesives
Mechanical Anchors
Gas & Powder Actuated
www.strongtie.com
www.strongtie.asia
QUICK FACTS ABOUT SIMPSON STRONG-TIE

Founded
1956 in Oakland, California, U.S.A.
Home Office U.S.A
Asia
3/F Cambridge House, #301
Taikoo Place, 979 Kings Road
Quarry Bay, Hong Kong
Simpson Strong-Tie
5956 W Las Positas Blvd
Pleasanton, CA 94588 U.S.A.
Tel: 1-925-560-9000
Middle East
Warehouse No.35, LIU 15
Street 710, Round About No. 7
Jebel Ali Free Zone
P.O.Box 262983 Jebel Ali
Dubai, UAE
Company Overview For more than 50 years, Simpson Strong-Tie has been helping people build safer, stronger structures economically. The
company is the leader in structural systems technology and has earned a reputation for providing customers with innovative,
high-quality products, technical and field support, testing and training.
Simpson Strong-Tie designs, engineers and manufactures steel connectors, lateral systems, anchor and fastening
systems. These products are used to secure the frame of structures and buildings. We have laboratory facilities that are
dedicated to finding solutions to improve the way structures are designed and built. The companys research is being
used to help advance the industry and develop products that help structures resist earthquakes, typhoons and high-wind
storms.
Customers Simpson Strong-Tie serves the new construction, retrofitting and do-it-yourself (DIY) markets. Customers include
builders, contractors, engineers, architects, building officials, dealers, distributors and owners.
Employees Approximately 2,500 employees world-wide
Factories, offices, and warehouses in

Asia, Australia, Austria, Canada, Denmark,
France, Germany, Poland, Scotland,
Switzerland, UK, UAE and U.S.A
Distribution in Australia, Canada, Chile,

Western Europe and part of Eastern
Europe, Middle East, Japan, Korea,
Mexico, New Zealand, UK, U.S.A and other
Asian countries
Web sites www.strongtie.com; www.strongtie.asia

Stock Symbol SSD, New York Stock Exchange
Every day we work hard to earn your business,

blending the talents of our people with the quality of
our products and services to exceed your expectations.
WE ARE ISO 9001-2000 REGISTERED

SIMPSON STRONG-TIE QUALITY POLICY
We help people build safer structures economically. We do this by designing,
engineering and manufacturing No Equal structural connectors and other related
products that meet or exceed our customers needs and expectations.
Everyone is responsible for product quality and is committed to ensuring
the effectiveness of the Quality Management System.
2
C- APACME -2012 2012 SIMPSON STRONG-TIE
World-wide
Locations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adhesives
Mechanical Anchors
AT-HPTM Adhesive ..............................................30-34
Blue Banger Hanger ................................................ 66
Adhesive Accessories ........................................35-36
BOAX-II Expansion Anchor ................................57-61
Adhesive Anchoring Installation Instructions .... 1516
Drop-In Anchor ..................................................62-64
Crack Injection Guide .............................................. 43
HWA Hollow Wall Anchors ...................................... 70
Crack-Pac Flex H2O ............................................. 44
Liebig Anchor.....................................................89-93
Crack-Pac Flex H2O Method Statement ..........45-46
NailonTM Pin Drive Anchors ..................................... 69
Crack Repair Accessories........................................ 47
Safety Bolt......................................................... 8288
Crack Repair Method Statement ............................. 42
Sleeve All Anchor .................................................... 65
ET Epoxy-Tie Adhesive .....................................18-22
Superplus Undercut Anchor .............................. 7781
ETI-LV and -GV Crack Injection Adhesives .............. 41
Titen HD Anchor .............................................. 4952
Epoxy-Tie Usage Estimation Guides ...................... 28
Titen Concrete and Masonry Screws .............................. 67
KLP Chemical Capsule .......................................37-38
Titen Stainless-Steel Concrete and Masonry Screws ........... 68
RFB Threaded Stud ................................................. 39
Torq-Cut Anchor ................................................... 53
SET-XP Adhesive .............................................23-27
Wedge Anchor Throughbolt WA ....................... 5456
Gas-Actuated Fastening
Ultraplus Undercut Anchor.................................72-76
GCN150 Gas-Actuated Concrete Nailer System .............95-96
Other
Powder-Actuated Fastening
Allowable Stress Design Method............................. 10
Fasteners .........................................................99-106
Corrosion Information............................................... 9
Powder Loads ......................................................... 99
Design Software.................................................... 128
PT-27 General Purpose Tool ................................... 98

PTP-27ASX & PTP-27ASMAGR Premium Tools ..... 97
General Instructions for the Designer ....................... 6

General Instructions for the Installer ......................... 5
Other Systems
Project Referrals ............................................116-126
Cold Formed Steel Connectors .......................110-111
Supplemental Topics for Anchors ..........................6-8
Concrete Reinforcement ....................................... 114
Table Icons ............................................................... 4
Construction Chemicals ........................................ 115
Testing Reports..................................................... 127
Quik Drive Collated Fastener System ................... 112
Treatment of Design Methods ............................13-14
Specialty Fasteners ............................................... 113
Strength Design Method ....................................10-12
Wood Connectors ..........................................108-109

3
IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND GENERAL NOTES

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE
PRODUCT USE
Products in this catalog are designed and manufactured for the specific
purposes shown, and should not be used in construction not approved by
a qualified designer. Modifications to products or changes in installation
procedures should only be made by a qualified designer. The performance
of such modified products or altered installation procedures is the sole
responsibility of the designer.
Non-catalog products must be designed by the customer and will be

fabricated by Simpson Strong-Tie in accordance with customer
specifications.
Simpson Strong-Tie cannot and does not make any representations
regarding the suitability of use or load-carrying capacities of non-catalog
products. Simpson Strong-Tie provides no warranty, express or implied,
on non-catalog products.
Product is sold ex-factory or warehouse unless otherwise specified.
INDEMNITY
Customers modifying products or installation procedures, or designing
non-catalog products for fabrication by Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. shall,
regardless of specific instructions to the user, indemnify, defend,
and hold harmless Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. for any and all
claimed loss or damage occasioned in whole or in part by non-catalog or
modified products.
SPECIAL ORDER PRODUCTS

Some products can be ordered as special sizes or with other
modifications. Contact Simpson Strong-Tie for information on special
order products. Additional lead time and charges may apply. Special order
products are non-cancellable, non-refundable and non-returnable.
NON-CATALOG AND MODIFIED PRODUCTS

Consult Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. for product applications for which
there is no catalog information, or for anchors or fasteners for use in hostile
environments, or with abnormal loading or erection requirements.
Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. warrants catalog products to be free from

substantial defects in material or manufacturing. Simpson Strong-Tie Asia
Ltd. products are further warranted for adequacy of design when used in
accordance with design limits in this catalog and when properly specified,
installed, and maintained. This warranty does not apply to uses
not in compliance with specific applications and installation procedures
set forth in this catalog, or to non-catalog or modified products, or to
deterioration due to environmental conditions.
Simpson Strong-Tie products are designed to enable structures to
resist the movement, stress, and loading that results from impact events
such as earthquakes and high velocity winds. Simpson Strong-Tie
products are designed to the load capacities and uses listed in this catalog.
Properly-installed Simpson Strong-Tie products will perform substantially
in accordance with the specifications set forth on the website or in the
applicable Simpson catalog. Additional performance limitations for specific
products may be listed on the applicable catalog pages.
quality of construction, and the condition of the soils involved, damage may
nonetheless result to a structure and its contents even if the loads resulting
from the impact event do not exceed Simpson catalog specifications and
Simpson Strong-Tie products are properly installed in accordance with
applicable building codes.
All warranty obligations of Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. shall be limited,
at the discretion of Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd., to repair or replacement
of the defective part. These remedies shall constitute Simpson Strong-Tie
Asia Ltd.'sole obligation and sole remedy of purchaser under this warranty.
In no event will Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. be responsible for incidental,
consequential, or special loss or damage, however caused.
This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties, expressed
or implied, including warranties of merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose, all such other warranties being hereby expressly
excluded. This warranty may change periodically consult Simpson
Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. for current information.
Due to the particular characteristics of potential impact events, the

specific design and location of the structure, the building materials used, the
TABLE ICON SYSTEM

In order to allow easier identification of performance data, the following icon system has been incorporated into the sections of the catalog with multiple
load tables. These icons will appear in the heading of the table to promote easier visual identification of the type of load, insert type and substrate addressed
in the table. Icons are intended for quick identification. All specific information regarding suitability should be read from the table itself.
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Steel
Normal-Weight
Concrete
Tension Load
Lightweight
Concrete
Shear Load
Concrete Block
(CMU)
Oblique Load
Lightweight Concrete
over Metal Deck
Edge Distance
Unreinforced
Brick (URM)
Spacing
For the most up-to-date information about our products visit our website at:
www.strongtie.com
4
LIMITED WARRANTY

WARNING
Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. structural connectors, anchors and other
products are designed and tested to provide specified design loads. To
obtain optimal performance from Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. products
and achieve maximum allowable design load and design strength, the
products must be properly installed and used in accordance with the
installation instructions and design limits provided by Simpson Strong-Tie
Asia Ltd. To ensure proper installation and use, designers and installers
must carefully read the following General Notes, General Instructions for
the Installer and General Instructions for the Designer as well as consult the
applicable catalog pages for specific product installation instructions and
notes. If you do not understand the catalog, or if you have any questions,
contact Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. for further information.
In addition to following all notes, warnings and instructions provided in

the catalog, installers, designers, engineers and consumers should consult
the Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. web site at www.strongtie.com to obtain
additional design and installation information.
Failure to follow fully all of the notes and instructions provided by
Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. may result in improper design or installation
of products. Improperly designed or installed products may not perform
to the specifications set forth in this catalog and may reduce a structures
ability to resist the movement, stress and loading that occurs from gravity
loads as well as impact events such as earthquakes and high velocity winds.
Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. does not guarantee the performance or
safety of products that are modified, improperly installed, or not used in
accordance with the design and load limits set forth in this catalog.
GENERAL NOTES
These general notes are provided to ensure proper
installation of Simpson Strong-Tie Company Asia
Ltd. products and must be followed fully.
a) Simpson Strong-Tie Company Asia Ltd. reserves the
right to change specifications, designs, and models
without notice or liability for such changes.
b) Unless otherwise noted, dimensions are in

meters and loads are in kilograms.
c) Do not overload, which will jeopardize the anchorage.

Service loads shall not exceed published allowable
loads. Factored loads shall not exceed design strengths
calculated in accordance with published design data.
d) Some hardened fasteners may experience premature failure if exposed
to moisture. These fasteners are recommended to be used in dry
interior applications.
e) Do not weld products listed in this catalog. Some steel types
have poor weldability and a tendency to crack when welded.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER

These general instructions for the installer are provided to ensure the
proper selection and installation of Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. products
and must be followed carefully. These general instructions are in addition to
the specific design and installation instructions and notes provided for each
particular product, all of which should be consulted prior to and during the
installation of Simpson Strong-Tie Company Asia Ltd. products.
a) Do not modify Simpson Strong-Tie products. The performance
of modified products may be substantially weakened.
Simpson Strong-Tie will not warrant or guarantee the performance
of such modified products.
b) Do not alter installation procedures from those set forth in this
catalog.
are recommended for drilling holes. When holes are to be drilled in

archaic or hollow base materials, the drill should be set to rotationonly mode.
d) For mechanical anchors that require a specific installation torque:
Failure to apply the recommended installation torque can result in
excessive displacement of the anchor under load or premature failure
of the anchor. These anchors will lose pre-tension after setting due to
pre-load relaxation. See Supplemental Topic M1 on page 7 for more
information.
e) Do not disturb, bolt up, or apply load to adhesive anchors prior to the
full cure of the adhesive.
f) Use proper safety equipment.
c) Drill holes for mechanical anchors with high quality carbide-tipped

drill bits meeting the diameter requirements of ANSI B212.15. A
properly-sized hole is critical to the performance of mechanical
anchors. Rotary-hammer drills with light, high-frequency impact

GENERAL
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
FOR THE
THE DESIGNER
DESIGNER
a) The term Designer used throughout this catalog is intended to

mean a licensed/certified building design professional, a licensed
professional engineer, or a licensed architect.
b) All connected members and related elements shall be designed by
the Designer and must have sufficient strength (bending, shear, etc)
to resist the loads imposed by the anchors.
c) When the allowable stress design method is used, the design service
loads shall not exceed the published allowable loads.
d) When the ultimate strength design method is used, the factored
loads shall not exceed the design strengths calculated in accordance
with the published design data.
e) Simpson Strong-Tie strongly recommends the following addition
to construction drawings and specifications: Simpson Strong-Tie
products are specifically required to meet the structural calculations
of plan. Before substituting another brand, confirm load capacity
based on reliable published testing data or calculations. The
Engineer/Designer of Record should evaluate and give written
approval for substitution prior to installation.
f)
Local and/or regional building codes may require meeting special

conditions. Building codes often require special inspections of
anchors installed in concrete or masonry. For compliance with these
requirements, it is necessary to contact the local and/or regional
building authority. Except where mandated by code, Simpson
Strong-Tie products do not require special inspection.
g) Allowable loads and design strengths are determined from test

results, calculations, and experience. These are guide values for
sound base materials with known properties. Due to variation in
base materials and site conditions, site-specific testing should be
conducted if exact performance in a specific base material at a
specific site must be known.
h) Unless stated otherwise, tests conducted to derive performance
information were performed in members with minimum thickness
equal to 1.5 times the anchor embedment depth. Anchoring into
thinner members requires the evaluation and judgment of a qualified
Designer.
i)
j)
Tests are conducted with anchors installed perpendicular (6) to the

surface of the base material. Deviations can result in anchor bending
stresses and reduce the load carrying capacity of the anchor.
Allowable loads and design strengths do not consider bending
stresses due to shear loads applied with large eccentricities.
k) Metal anchors and fasteners will corrode and may lose load-carrying
capacity when installed in corrosive environments or exposed to
corrosive materials. See Supplemental Topic G3.
l)
Mechanical anchors should not be installed into concrete that is

less than 7 days old. The allowable loads and design strengths of
mechanical anchors that are installed into concrete less than 28
days old should be based on the actual compressive strength of the
concrete at the time of installation.
m) Nominal embedment depth (embedment depth) is the distance from

the surface of the base material to the installed end of the anchor
and is measured prior to application of an installation torgue (if
applicable). Effective embedment depth is the distance from the
surface of the base material to the deepest point at which the load is
transferred to the base material.
n) Drill bits shall meet the diameter requirements of ANSI B212.15. For
adhesive anchor installations in oversized holes, see Supplemental
Topic A1. For adhesive anchor installations into core-drilled holes,
see Supplemental Topic A2.
o) Threaded-rod inserts for adhesive anchors shall be UNC fully
threaded steel.
p) Allowable loads and design strengths are generally based on testing
of adhesive anchors installed into dry holes. For installations in
damp, wet and submerged environments, see Supplemental Topic
A3.
q) Adhesive anchors should not be installed into concrete that is
less than 7 days old. The allowable loads and design strengths of
adhesive anchors that are installed into concrete less than 28 days
old should be based on the actual compressive strength of the
concrete at the time load is applied.
r) Adhesive anchors can be affected by elevated base material
temperature. See Supplemental Topic A4.
s) Anchors are permitted to support fire-resistive construction provided
at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: a) Anchors are
used to resist wind or seismic forces only. b) Anchors that support
gravity load-bearing structural elements are within a fire-resistancerated envelope or a fire-resistance-rated membrane, are protected by
approved fire-resistance rated materials, or have been evaluated for
resistance to fire exposure in accordance with recognized standards.
c) Anchors are used to support nonstructural elements.
t)
Some adhesives are not qualified for resisting long-term sustained

loads. These adhesives are for resisting short-term loads such as
wind or seismic loads only. See Supplemental Topic A5.
u) Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the bond strength of

adhesive anchors. Refer to the product description for chemical
resistance information. Information is also available through website,
Technical Bulletin T-SAS-CHEMRES.
SUPPLEMENTAL TOPICS FOR ANCHORS

GENERAL
G1. Base Materials
"Base material" is a generic industry term that refers to the element
or substrate to be anchored to. Base materials include concrete, brick,
concrete block (CMU) and structural tile, to name a few. The base material
will determine the type of fastener for the application. The most common
type of base material where adhesive and mechanical anchors are used is
concrete.
Concrete Concrete can be cast in place or precast concrete. Concrete

has excellent compressive strength, but relatively low tensile strength. Castin-place (or sometimes called "poured in place") concrete is placed in forms
erected on the building site. Cast-in-place concrete can be either normalweight or lightweight concrete. Lightweight concrete is specified when it is
desirable to reduce the weight of the building structure.
Lightweight concrete differs from normal-weight concrete by the weight of

aggregate used in the mixture. Normal-weight concrete has a unit weight of
approximately 2400kg per cubic meter compared to approximately 1837kg
per cubic meter for lightweight concrete.
The type of aggregate used in concrete can affect the tension capacity
of an adhesive anchor. Presently, the relationship between aggregate
properties and anchor performance is not well understood. A recent study
based on a limited test program has shown that in relative terms, concrete
with harder and more dense aggregates tend to yield greater anchor tension
capacities. Conversely, use of softer, less dense aggregates tends to
result in lower anchor tension capacities. Research in this area is ongoing.
Test results should not be assumed to be representative of expected
performance in all types of
concrete aggregate.
These general instructions for the designer are provided to ensure the
proper selection and installation of Simpson Strong-Tie products and must
be followed carefully. These general instructions are in addition to the
specific design and installation instructions and notes provided for each
particular product, all of which should be consulted prior to and during the
design process.

Prefabricated concrete is also referred to as "precast concrete". Precast
concrete can be made at a prefabricating plant or site-cast in forms
constructed on the job. Precast concrete members may be solid or may
contain hollow cores. Many precast components have thinner cross sections
than cast in place concrete. Precast concrete may be either normal or
lightweight concrete. Reinforced concrete contains steel bars, cable, wire
mesh or random glass fibers. The addition of reinforcing material enables
concrete to resist tensile stresses which lead to cracking.
The compressive strength of concrete varies according to the proportions
of the components in the mixture. The desired compressive strength of the
concrete will be specified according to the application. Water and cement
content of the mix is the main determinant of the compressive strength.
The compressive strength of concrete can range from 13.8 MPa to over
138 MPa, depending on the mixture and how it is cured. Most concrete mixes
are designed to obtain the desired properties within 28 days after being cast.
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) Block is typically formed with large
hollow cores. Block with a minimum 75% solid cross section is called solid
block even though it contains hollow cores. In many parts of the country
building codes require steel reinforcing bars to be placed in the hollow
cores, and the cores to be filled solid with grout.
In some areas of the world, past practice was to mix concrete with coal
cinders to make cinder blocks. Although cinder blocks are no longer made,
there are many existing buildings where they can be found. Cinder blocks
require special attention as they soften with age.
Brick Clay brick is formed solid or with hollow cores. The use of either
type will vary in different parts of the world. Brick can be difficult to drill
and anchor into. Most brick is hard and brittle. Old, red clay brick is often
very soft and is easily over-drilled. Either of these situations can cause
problems in drilling and anchoring. The most common use of brick today
is for building facades (curtain wall or brick veneer) and not for structural
applications. Brick facade is attached to the structure by the use of brick ties
spaced at intervals throughout the wall. In older buildings, multiple widths,
or wythes of solid brick were used to form the structural walls. Three and
four wythe walls were common wall thicknesses.
Clay Tile Clay tile block is formed with hollow cores and narrow cavity
wall cross sections. Clay tile is very brittle, making drilling difficult without
breaking the block. Caution must be used in attempting to drill and fasten
into clay tile.
G2. Anchor failure modes

Anchor Failure Modes
The failure modes for both mechanical and adhesive anchors depends
on a number of factors including the anchor type and geometry, anchor
material mechanical properties, base material mechanical properties, loading
type and direction, edge distance, spacing and embedment depth.
Six different failure modes are generally observed for mechanical and
adhesive anchors installed in concrete under tension loading: concrete cone
breakout, concrete edge breakout, concrete splitting, anchor slip, adhesive
bond, and steel fracture. Three failure modes are generally observed for
mechanical and adhesive anchors installed in concrete under shear loading:
concrete edge breakout, pryout and steel failure.
mode is also observed for groups of mechanical and adhesive anchors

installed at less than critical spacing.
Concrete Edge Breakout Failure
This failure mode is observed for both mechanical and adhesive anchors
installed at less than critical edge distance under either tension or shear
loading. For this failure mode neither the adhesive nor mechanical anchor
fail, but rather the concrete fails. According to Simpson Strong-Tie testing,
the tension load at which failure occurs is correlated to the concrete
aggregate performance. Other factors may also influence tension load.
Concrete Splitting Failure
installed in a "thin" concrete member under tension loading.
Anchor Slipping Failure
This failure mode is observed for mechanical anchors under tension
loading in which the anchor either pulls out of the member (e.g.- a Drop-In
Anchor installed through metal deck and into a concrete fill) or the anchor
body pulls through the expansion clip (e.g.- a Wedge Anchor Throughbolt
anchor installed at a deep embedment depth in concrete).
Adhesive Bond Failure
This failure mode is observed for adhesive anchors under tension loading
in which a shallow concrete cone breakout is observed along with an
adhesive bond failure at the adhesive/base material interface. The concretecone breakout is not the primary failure mechanism.
Steel Fracture
under tension or shear loading where the concrete member thickness and
mechanical properties along with the anchor embedment depth, edge distance,
spacing, and adhesive bond strength (as applicable), preclude base material
failure.
Pryout Failure
installed at shallow embedment under shear loading.
G3. Corrosion resistance

Metal anchors and fasteners will corrode and may lose load-carrying
capacity when installed in corrosive environments or exposed to corrosive
materials. There are many environments and materials which may cause
corrosion including ocean salt air, fire-retardants, fumes, fertilizers,
preservative-treated wood, dissimilar metals, and other corrosive elements.
Some types of preservative-treated woods and fire-retardant woods are
known to be especially caustic to zinc and can cause anchors and fasteners
to deteriorate. Zinc-coated anchors and fasteners should not be placed in
contact with treated wood unless the treated wood is adequately verified to
be suitable for such contact. Contact wood supplier for further information.
Some products are available with additional coating options or in
stainless steel to provide additional corrosion resistance.
Highly-hardened fasteners can experience premature failure due to
hydrogen-assisted stress corrosion cracking when loaded in environments
producing hydrogen. Simpson Strong-Tie recommends that such fasteners
be used in dry, interior and non-corrosive environments only.
Concrete Cone Breakout Failure

installed at shallow embedment depths under tension loading. This failure
MECHANICAL ANCHORS
M1. Pre-Load Relaxation
Expansion anchors that have been set to the required installation torque
in concrete will experience a reduction in pre-tension (due to torque) within
several hours. This is known as pre-load relaxation. The high compression
stresses placed on the concrete cause it to deform which results in a
relaxation of the pre-tension force in the anchor. Tension in this context

refers to the internal stresses induced in the anchor as a result of applied
torque and does not refer to anchor capacity. Historical data shows it is
normal for the initial tension values to decrease by as much as 4060%
within the first few hours after installation. Retorquing the anchor to the
initial installation torque is not recommended, or necessary.

ADHESIVE ANCHORS
Epoxy-Tie (ET)
A1. Oversized Holes
Insert Acceptable Hole Acceptable

Diameter Diameter Range Load Reduction
(mm)
(mm)
Factor
A2. Core-Drilled Holes

The performance data for adhesive anchors are based upon anchor
tests in which holes were drilled with carbide-tipped drill bits. Additional
static tension tests were conducted to qualify anchors installed with ET
anchoring adhesive for installation in holes drilled with diamond-core bits.
In these tests the diameter of the diamond-core bit matched the diameter
of the carbide-tipped drill bit recommended in the products load table. The
test results showed that no reduction of the published allowable tension
load for ET anchoring adhesive is necessary for this condition. The same
conclusions also apply to the published allowable shear loads. Please note
that the use of core-drilled holes is NOT permitted for anchors installed with
SET-XP .
A3. Installation in Damp, Wet and Submerged Environments

SET-XP: The performance data for adhesive anchors using SET-XP
epoxy anchoring adhesive are based upon tests according to ICC-ES AC308.
This criterion requires adhesive anchors that are to be installed in outdoor
environments to be tested in water-saturated concrete holes that have
been cleaned with less than the amount of hole cleaning recommended
by the manufacturer. A products sensitivity to this installation condition
is considered in determining the products Anchor Category (strength
reduction factor).
Based on Reliability Testing per ICC-ES AC308
Dry Concrete Cured concrete whose moisture content is in
equilibrium with surrounding non-precipitate atmospheric conditions.
Water-Saturated Concrete Cured concrete whose internal aggregate
materials are soaked with moisture.
Submerged Concrete Cured concrete that is covered with water and
water saturated.
Water-Filled Hole Drilled hole in water-saturated concrete that is
clean yet contains standing water at the time of installation.
ET, AT-HP and KLP: The performance data for adhesive anchors using
ET, AT-HP and KLP adhesives are based upon tests in which anchors are
installed in dry holes. Additional static tension tests were conducted for
some products in damp holes, water-filled holes and submerged holes. The
test results show that no reduction of the published allowable tension load
is necessary for ET adhesive in damp holes. For ET adhesive in submerged
holes, the test results show that a reduction factor of 0.60 is applicable. The
same conclusions also apply to the published allowable shear load values.
Based on Service Condition Testing per ICC-ES AC58
Dry Concrete Cured concrete whose moisture content is in
equilibrium with surrounding non-precipitate atmospheric conditions.
Damp Hole - A damp hole, as defined in ASTM E1512 and referenced
in ICC-ES AC58, is a drilled hole that has been properly drilled, cleaned
and then is filled with standing water for seven days. After seven days,
the standing water is blown out of the hole with compressed air and
the adhesive anchor is installed.
Water-Filled Hole - A water-filled hole is defined similarly to a damp
hole; however, the standing water is not blown out of the hole.
Instead, the adhesive is injected directly into the water-filled hole
(from the bottom of the hole up) and the insert is installed.
10
12
16
20
25
28
32
34
12 - 18
16 - 23
19 - 28
22 - 33
29 - 43
32 - 48
35 - 53
38 - 57
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Submerged Hole - A submerged hole is similar to a water-filled hole

with one major exception in addition to standing water within the
hole; water also completely covers the surface of the base material as
well. Note that drilling debris and sludge should be removed from the
drilled hole prior to installation. ASTM E1512 and ICC-ES AC58 do not
address this condition.
A4. Elevated In-Service Temperature

The performance of all adhesive anchors is affected by elevated base
material temperature. The in-service temperature sensitivity table provided
for each adhesive provides the information necessary to apply the
appropriate load-adjustment factor to either the allowable tension based on
bond strength or allowable shear based on concrete edge distance based
for a given base material temperature. While there is no commonly used
method to determine the exact load-adjustment factor, there are a few
guidelines to keep in mind when designing an anchor that will be subject to
elevated base-material temperature. In any case, the final decision must be
made by a qualified design professional using sound engineering judgment:
When designing an anchor connection to resist wind and/or
seismic forces only, the effect of fire (elevated temperature) may be
disregarded.
The base-material temperature represents the average internal
temperature and hence, the temperature along the entire bonded
length of the anchor.
The effects of elevated temperature may be temporary. If the
in-service temperature of the base material is elevated such that a
load-adjustment factor is applicable, but over time the temperature
is reduced to a temperature below which a load-adjustment factor
is applicable, the full allowable load based on bond strength is
still applicable. This is applicable provided that the degradation
temperature of the anchoring adhesive (176 C for SET-XP and ET)
has not been reached.
A5. Creep Under Long-Term Loads

Creep is the slow continuous deformation of a material under constant
stress. Creep occurs in many construction materials, including concrete
and steel when the stress is great enough. The creep characteristics of
adhesives are product dependent. Adhesive anchors that are not creep
resistant can pull out slowly over time when sustained tensile loads are
applied.
Because of the creep phenomenon, it is important for Designers to
consider the nature of the applied tension loads and to determine if the
tension loads will be continuously applied to the anchor over the long-term.
If this is the case, a product that is suitable for resisting sustained loads
over the long-term must be selected.
All Simpson Strong-Tie anchoring adhesives (SET-XP, ET and AT-HP)
have been qualified for resisting long-term loads through ETA or ICC-ES or
AC58 or AC308 creep tests in which an anchor is loaded and monitored
for movement over time. According to AC58 and AC308, anchors that pass
the creep test are determined to be suitable for resisting long-term tensile
loads.
The performance data for adhesive anchors are based upon anchor
tests in which holes were drilled with carbide-tipped drill bits of the same
diameter listed in the products load table. Additional static tension tests
were conducted to qualify anchors installed with ET adhesive for installation
in holes with diameters larger than those listed in the load tables. The tables
indicate the acceptable range of drilled-hole sizes and the corresponding
allowable tension-load reduction factor (if any). The same conclusions also
apply to the published allowable shear load values. Drilled holes outside
of the range shown below are not recommended. Please note that the use
of oversized holes is NOT permitted for anchors installed with SET-XP
adhesive.
CORROSION INFORMATION
UNDERSTANDING THE ISSUES

Metal anchors and fasteners will corrode and may lose load-carrying
capacity when installed in corrosive environments or exposed to corrosive
materials. There are many environments and materials which may cause
corrosion including ocean salt air, fire-retardants, fumes, fertilizers,
preservative-treated wood, dissimilar metals, and other corrosive elements.
The many variables present in a single building environment make it
impossible to accurately predict if, or when, significant corrosion will
begin or reach a critical level. This relative uncertainty makes it crucial that
specifiers and users be knowledgeable of the potential risks and select a
product coating or metal suitable for the intended use. It is also important
that regular maintenance and periodic inspections are performed, especially
for outdoor applications.
It is common to see some corrosion on anchors and fasteners especially
in outdoor applications. Even stainless steel can corrode. The presence
of some corrosion does not mean that load capacity has necessarily been
affected or that a failure will occur. If significant corrosion is apparent or
suspected, then the wood, anchors and fasteners should be inspected by a
professional engineer or general contractor and may need to be replaced.
In the last several years, preservative-treated wood formulations have
changed significantly. Many of the new formulations are more corrosive to
steel anchors and fasteners than the traditionally used formulation of CCA-C.
Simpson Strong-Tie testing has shown that ACQ-C, ACQ-D (Carbonate),
CBA-A and CA-B treated woods are approximately 2 times more corrosive
than CCA-C, while SBX-DOT (Sodium Borate) treated woods were shown to
be less corrosive than CCA-C. (See technical bulletin T-PTWOOD for details).
GENERAL SIMPSON STRONG-TIE RECOMMENDATIONS
Outdoor environments are generally more corrosive to steel. If you
choose to use MG or HDG finish on an outdoor project (i.e. structure ,
railing), you should periodically inspect your anchors and fasteners or
have a professional inspection performed. Regular maintenance including
water-proofing of the wood used in your outdoor project is also a good
practice.
For wood with actual retention levels greater than 0.40 pcf for ACQ
and MCQ, 0.41 pcf for CBA-A, or 0.21 pcf for CA-B (ground contact),
stainless-steel anchors and fasteners are recommended. Verify actual
retention level with the wood treater.
Due to the many different preservative-treatment formulations, fluctuating

retention levels, moisture content, and because the formulations may vary
regionally, or change without warning, understanding which anchors and
fasteners to use with these materials has become a complex task. We
have attempted to provide basic knowledge on the subject here, but it is
important to fully educate yourself by reviewing our technical bulletins on
the topic, and also by viewing information and literature provided by others.
Additionally, because the issue is evolving, it is important to get the very
latest anchor and fastener information on the topic by visiting our website at
www.strongtie.com/info.
Stainless steel is always the most effective solution to corrosion risk.
However, it is also more expensive and sometimes more difficult to obtain.
To best serve our customers, Simpson Strong-Tie is evaluating the options
to identify the safest and most cost-effective solutions. Based on our testing
and experience there are some specific applications that are appropriate for
hot-dip galvanized (HDG), mechanically galvanized (MG) or electroplated
anchors (see chart below).
Because increased corrosion from some newer preservative-treated
wood is a new issue with little historical data, we have to base our
recommendations on the testing and experience we have to date. It is
possible that as we learn more, our recommendations may change, but
these recommendations are based on the best information we have at this
time.
See www.strongtie.com/info for additional critical information.
Testing indicates wood installed dry reduces potential corrosion. If dry

wood is used, see our website for additional information.
Due to the many variables involved, Simpson Strong-Tie cannot provide
estimates on service life of anchors or fasteners. We suggest that all users
and specifiers also obtain recommendations for HDG, MG, or other coatings
from the treated-wood supplier for the type of wood used. However, as long
as Simpson Strong-Tie recommendations are followed, Simpson Strong-Tie
stands behind its product performance and the standard limited warranty
(page 10) applies.
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING THE PROPER ANCHOR OR FASTENER
Evaluate the Application.

Low = Use Simpson Strong-Tie zinc plated anchors or fasteners as
Consider the type of structure and how it will be used. These recommendations
a minimum.
may not apply to non-structural applications such as fences.
Med = Use MG (ASTM B695, Class 55. Minimum 65 micron coating
thickness), HDG or Type 410 stainless steel as a minimum.
Evaluate the Environment.
2
High = Use Type 304 (A2) or 316 (A4) stainless steel anchors and
Testing and experience indicate that indoor dry environments are less corrosive
fasteners as a minimum.
than outdoor environments. Determining the type of environment where an anchor
or fastener will be used is an important factor in selecting the most
appropriate material and finish for use on the anchors and fasteners. To help in
your decision making, consider the following general exposure information:
Interior Dry Use: Includes wall and ceiling cavities, and raised floor
applications of enclosed buildings that have been designed to ensure that
condensation and other sources of moisture do not develop.
Exterior - Dry: Includes outdoor installations in low-rainfall environments
and no regular exposure to moisture.
Exterior - Wet: Includes outdoor installations in higher moisture and rainfall
environments.
Higher Exposure Use: Includes exposure to ocean-salt air, large bodies of
water, fumes, fertilizers, soil, some preservative-treated woods, industrial
zones, acid rain, and other corrosive elements.
Evaluate and select a suitable preservative-treated wood for

the intended application and environment.
The treated- wood supplier should provide all the information needed
regarding the wood being used. This information should include: the specific
type of wood treatment used, if ammonia was used in the treatment, and the
chemical retention level. If the needed information is not provided then
Simpson Strong-Tie would recommend the use of stainless-steel anchors and
fasteners. You should also ask the treated-wood supplier for an anchor or
fastener coating or material recommendation.
Use the chart on the right, which was created based on Simpson
Strong-Tie testing and experience to select the anchor or fastener
finish or material.
If a preservative-treated wood product is not identified on the chart, Simpson 5 Compare the treated wood supplier's recommendation with
the Simpson Strong-Tie recommendation.
Strong-Tie has not evaluated test results regarding such product and
If these recommendations are different, Simpson Strong-Tie
therefore cannot make any recommendation other than the use of stainless
steel with that product. Manufacturers may independently provide test results recommends that the most conservative recommendation be followed.
or other product use information; Simpson Strong-Tie expresses no opinion
regarding any such information.
1. Woods with actual retention levels greater than 0.40 pcf for ACQ and MCQ, 0.41
pcf for CBA-A, or 0.21 pcf for CA-B (Ground Contact level).
2. Borate treated woods are not appropriate for outdoor use.
3. Test results indicate that MG/HDG will perform adequately, subject to regular
maintenance and periodic inspection. However, the test method used is an
accelerated test, so data over an extended period of time is not available.
If uncertain, use 304 (A2) or 316 (A4) stainless steel.
4. Some treated wood may have excess surface chemicals making it potentially
more corrosive. If you suspect this or are uncertain, use 304 (A2) or 316 (A4)
stainless steel.
5. Mechanically-galvanized Titen HD anchors are only recommended for
temporary exterior applications.
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) METHOD

In allowable stress design (ASD), the Designer must size the anchorage
such that the service load does not exceed the allowable load for any anchor:
Tservice Tallowable
Vservice Vallowable
For some anchors, the average ultimate load and/or allowable load is also
controlled by anchor displacement limits.
The allowable loads for steel inserts used with adhesive anchors is
determined as follows:
For threaded rod: Tallowable = 0.33 FuAg ; Vallowable = 0.17FuAg
For Grade 60 rebar: Tallowable = (165 MPa)Ag ;
Vallowable = 0.17(620 MPa)Ag
Where:
Ag = Gross cross-sectional area of the insert
For anchors subjected to simultaneous tension and shear loading, the

following equation must be satisfied, where the value of n is productspecific. Use a value of n=1 unless otherwise specified in the applicable
products load table.
Tservice n
Vservice n
+
1.0
Tallowable Vallowable
Linear interpolation of allowable loads between embedment depths and/

or compressive strengths shown in the load tables is permitted. Linear
interpolation of load-adjustment factors in the edge distance and spacing
tables is also permitted.
The allowable loads in this catalog are derived from full-scale testing,
calculations, and/or experience. In general, the allowable load is determined
by taking the average ultimate load from full scale tests and dividing by a
safety factor ().
Threaded Insert
Steel Type
Fu
(MPa)
A307, Grade C
400
A193, Grade B7
861
304/316 (A2/A4) Stainless

(Diam. 16mm)
689
304/316 (A2/A4) Stainless

(Diam 19mm)
586
Where:
Fu = Ultimate tensile strength of steel insert
T
V
Tallowable = ultimate ; Vallowable = ultimate
STRENGTH DESIGN (SD) METHOD

In strength design (SD), the Designer must size the anchorage such that
the required strength (i.e. factored load) does not exceed the lowest design
strength of the anchor or anchor group considering all possible failure modes.
Nua Nn
Vua Vn
Calculations are performed in accordance with the applicable design

standards: ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 Appendix D for mechanical anchors
and ICC-ES AC308 for adhesive and torque-controlled adhesive anchors. The
additional design provisions of AC308 are shown elsewhere in this catalog.
The nominal strengths and design data in this catalog are derived from
full-scale testing and calculations in accordance with ACI 355.2, ICC-ES AC193
and ICC-ES AC308. In general, nominal strengths are 5% fractile strengths
calculated using the average ultimate load, and standard deviation of full-scale
test results. A 5% fractile strength is the nominal strength for which there is a
90% confidence that there is a 95% probability of the actual strength exceeding
the nominal strength.
For anchors that are designed using ACI 318 Appendix D, AC193, or AC308,
it is possible to convert design strengths (i.e. Nn or Vn) to
allowable loads using the following approach from AC193 (dated February
2008) and AC308 (dated February 2008):
Nn
V
Tallowable, ASD =
and Vallowable, ASD = n
Where:
Tallowable,ASD = Allowable tension load

Vallowable,ASD = Allowable shear load
10
(UNDER ACI 318

APPENDIX D, ICC-ES AC193,
AND ICC-ES AC308)

Nn = Lowest design strength of an anchor or anchor group in tension
as determined per ACI 318 Appendix D, AC193, AC308 and IBC Section
1908.1.16.

Vn = Lowest design strength of an anchor or anchor group in shear
as determined per ACI 318 Appendix D, AC193, AC308 and IBC Section
1908.1.16.

= Conversion factor calculated as a weighted average of the load factors for the controlling load combination. In addition, shall include all
applicable factors to account for non-ductile failure modes and required
over-strength.
Interaction shall be calculated as follows:
For tension loads, T 0.2Tallowable, the full allowable load in shear shall be
permitted.
For shear loads, V 0.2Vallowable, the full allowable load in tension shall be
permitted.
For all other cases:
T
V
+
1.2
Vallowable
Tallowable
The Designer must read the allowable load from the applicable table and
adjust the allowable load for all applicable design parameters for the anchor,
such as spacing, edge distance, in-service temperature or allowable-stress
increase for short-term loads. Load-adjustment factors for anchors are
applied cumulatively. For adhesive anchors, the designer must also ensure
that the service load does not exceed the allowable load of the steel insert.
ICC-ES AC308 STRENGTH DESIGN METHOD FOR ADHESIVE AND

TORQUE-CONTROLLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS
Strength design calculations are performed in accordance
with ICC-ES AC308, which makes the following amendments to
ACI 318 Appendix D:
3.3 Strength design - amendments to ACI 318:
3.3.1 Adhesive anchors: This section provides amendments to ACI 318
Appendix D as required for the strength design of adhesive anchors. In
conformance with ACI 318, all equations are expressed in inch-pound units.
3.3.1.1 Add Section D.4.1.2, D.4.1.4, D.5.2.9, D.5.3.7, D.5.3.8, D.5.3.9,
D.5.3.10, D.5.3.11, D.5.3.12, D.5.3.13, and D.6.3.2 to ACI 318 as follows:
D.4.1.2 In Eq. (D-1) and (D-2), Nn and Vn are the lowest design
strengths determined from all appropriate failure modes. Nn is the lowest
design strength in tension of an anchor or group of anchors as determined
from consideration of Nnsa, either Na or Nag and either Ncb or Ncbg.
Vn is the lowest design strength in shear of an anchor or a group of
anchors as determined from consideration of: Vsa, either Vcb or Vcbg,
and either Vcp or Vcpg.
D.4.1.4 For adhesive anchors installed overhead and subjected to tension

resulting from sustained loading, Eq. (D-1) shall also be satisfied taking
Nn = 0.75Na for single anchors and Nn = 0.75Nag for groups of anchors, whereby Nua is determined from the sustained load alone, e.g., the
dead load and that portion of the live load acting that may be considered as
sustained. Where shear loads act concurrently with the sustained tension
load, interaction of tension and shear shall be checked in accordance with
Section D.4.1.3.
D.5.2.9 - The limiting concrete strength of adhesive anchors in tension
shall be calculated in accordance with D.5.2.1 to D.5.2.8 where the value of
k to be used in Eq. (D-7) shall be
D.5.3.7 - The nominal strength of an adhesive anchor Na or group of

adhesive anchors Nag in tension shall not exceed
(a) for a single anchor
A
Na = Na ed,Na p,Na Na0
ANa0
(b) for a group of anchors
Nag =
ANa
N
ANa0 ed,Na g,Na ec,Na p,Na a0
(D-16b)
where
ANa is the projected area of the failure surface for the anchor or group
of anchors that shall be approximated as the base of the rectilinear geometrical figure that results from projecting the failure surface outward
a distance ccr,Na from the center lines of the anchor, or in the case of a
group of anchors, from a line through a row of adjacent anchors. ANa
shall not exceed nANaO where n is the number of anchors in tension in
the group. (Refer to ACI 318 Figures RD.5.2.1(a) and RD.5.2.1(b) and replace the terms 1.5hef and 3.0hef with ccr,Na and scr,Na, respectively.)
ANa0 is the projected area of the failure surface of a single anchor without the influence of proximate edges in accordance with Eq. (D-16c):
ANa0 = (scr,Na)2
(D-16c)
k = 17 where analysis indicates cracking at service-load levels in the

anchor vicinity (cracked concrete)
with
k = 24 where analysis indicates no cracking (t < r) at service-load

levels in the anchor vicinity (uncracked concrete)
scr,Na = as given by Eq. (D-16d)
The value of k shall be permitted to be increased to k = 24 (cracked

concrete) and k = 30 (uncracked concrete) based on the results of tests in
accordance with AC308.
(D-16a)
D.5.3.8 - The critical spacing scr,Na and critical edge distance ccr,Na shall
be calculated as follows:
scr,Na = 20.d.
k,uncr
1,450
s
ccr,Na = cr,Na
2
3.hef
(D-16d)
(D-16e)
D.5.3.9 - The basic strength of a single adhesive anchor in tension in

cracked concrete shall not exceed
Na0 = k,cr dhef
(D-16f)
11
ICC-ES AC308 STRENGTH DESIGN METHOD FOR ADHESIVE AND

TORQUE-CONTROLLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS
Continued from previous page.
D.5.3.10 - The modification factor for the influence of the failure surface of
a group of adhesive anchors is
g,Na = g,Na0 +
[( s )
0.5
cr,Na
(1 g,Na0 )
(D-16g)

where
k,cr
g,Na0 = n - ( n - 1)
k,max,cr
(D-16h)
k,cr is the characteristic bond strength in cracked concrete having

strength 'c evaluated from tests per AC308.
kc,cr
.d
p,Na = 1.0
p,Na = max
when ca,min cac
|ca,min; ccr,Na |
cac
(D-16o)
when ca,min cac
(D-16p)
1.5
) ] 1.0
n is the number of tension loaded adhesive anchors in a group
k,max,cr =
D.5.3.14 - When an adhesive anchor or a group of adhesive anchors is

located in a region of a concrete member where analysis indicates no
cracking at service load levels, the modification factor p,Na shall be
taken as
hef . 'c
(D-16i)
where
cac shall be determined by testing in accordance with AC308.
For all other cases p,Na = 1.0.
D.6.3.2 - The nominal pryout strength of an adhesive anchor Vcp or group
of adhesive anchors Vcpg shall not exceed
(a) for a single adhesive anchor
Vcp = min kcp .Na ; kcp .Ncb
kc,cr = 17
(D-30a)
(b) for a group of adhesive anchors
whereby the value of kc,cr shall be permitted to be increased to a

maximum value based on the results of tests in cracked concrete in accordance with AC308
Vcpg = min kcp .Nag ; kcp .Ncbg
(D-30b)
where
kcp = 1.0 for hef < 2.5 in.
D.5.3.11 - The modification factor for eccentrically loaded adhesive anchor

groups is
ec,Na
1
1.0
1+ 2e'N
scr,Na
Na is calculated in accordance with Eq. (D-16a)

(D-16j)
Ncb , Ncbg are determined in accordance with D.5.2.9
s
Eq. (D-16j) is valid for e'N 2
If the loading on an anchor group is such that only some anchors are in
tension, only those anchors that are in tension shall be considered when
determining the eccentricity e'N for use in Eq. (D-16j).
In the case where eccentric loading exists about two othogonal axes, the
modification factor ec,Na shall be computed for each axis individually
and the product of these factors used as ec,Na in Eq. (D-16b).
D.5.3.12 - The modification factor for edge effects for single adhesive
anchors or anchor groups loaded in tension is
ed,Na = 1.0 when ca,min ccr,Na
ed,Na =
(0.7 + 0.3 cc ) 1.0

a,min
cr,Na
(D-16l)
(D-16m)
D.5.3.13 - When an adhesive anchor or a group of adhesive anchors is

located in a region of a concrete member where analysis indicates no
cracking at service load levels, the nominal strength Na or Nag of a single
adhesive anchor or a group of adhesive anchors shall be calculated
according to Eq. (D-16a) and Eq. (D-16b) with k,uncr substituted for k,cr
in the calculation of the basic strength Na0 in accordance with Eq. (D-16f)
k,uncr shall be established based on tests in accordance with AC308. The
factor g,Na0 shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. (D-16h) whereby
the value of k,max,uncr shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. (D-16n)
and substituted for k,max,cr in Eq. (D-16h)
kc,uncr
k,max,uncr =
hef . f'c
.d
12
Nag is calculated in accordance with Eq. (D-16b)
(D-16n)
D.8.7 - For adhesive anchors that will remain untorqued, the minimum
edge distance shall be based on minimum cover requirements for reinforcement in 7.7. For adhesive anchors that will be torqued, the minimum
edge distance and spacing shall be taken as 6do and 5do, respectively,
unless otherwise determined in accordance with AC308.
3.3.2 Torque-controlled adhesive anchors: This section provides
amendments to ACI 318 Appendix D as required for the strength design of
torque-controlled adhesive anchors.
3.3.2.1 Add Section D.5.3.7 to ACI 318 as follows:
D.5.3.7 - For torque-controlled adhesive anchors, the value of Np shall
be based on the 5 percent fractile of tests performed and evaluated in
accordance with AC308.
D.8.7 - For torque-controlled adhesive anchors the minimum edge
distance shall be taken as 8do unless otherwise determined by testing
in accordance with AC308.
NOTE: Bond strength determination: Bond strength values are a function
of the special-inspection level provided and installation conditions. Bond
strength values must be modified with the factor Ksat for cases where the
holes are drilled in water-saturated concrete as follows:
Special
Inspection
Level
Permissible
Installation Condition
Bond
Strength
Associated Strength
Reduction Factor
dry,ci
Continuous
Dry Concrete
Continuous
Water-saturated
k x Ksat,ci
sat,ci
Periodic
Dry Concrete
dry,pi
Periodic
Water-saturated
k x Ksat,pi
sat,pi
Where applicable, the modified bond strengths must be used in lieu of

k,cr or k,uncr in AC308 Equations (D-16a) and (D-16b). The resulting
nominal bond strength must be multiplied by the strength-reduction
factor for the special-inspection level listed above. The various factors are
given in Table 5 of ESR-2508 and page 35 of this catalog.
kcp = 2.0 for hef 2.5 in.
TREATMENT OF DESIGN METHODS
UNDER MODEL BUILDING CODES
Structural Post-Installed Anchor Design Methods Permitted by USA Building Codes

Permitted Design Methods3
Building Code
2009 IBC/IRC
2003 IBC/IRC
2000 IBC/IRC
1997 UBC
Base Material
Traditional
ASD
ACI 318
App. D/
ICC-ES AC193
ICC-ES
AC308
Concrete1
No
Yes
Yes
Masonry2
Yes
N/A4
N/A4
Concrete1
No
Yes
Yes
Masonry2
Yes
N/A4
N/A4
Concrete1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Masonry2
Yes
N/A4
N/A4
Concrete1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Masonry2
Yes
N/A4
N/A4
1. Concrete includes all concrete base materials such as concrete on metal deck and precast concrete shapes.
2. Masonry includes all masonry base materials such as hollow and grout-filled CMU and unreinforced brick masonry.
3. Code interpretations vary. Confirm with the local Building Official.
4. Not applicable since masonry is beyond the scope of this design method.
Building codes and material standards have traditionally allowed Designers to take a one third allowablestress increase on the calculated design capacities of some building materials and components when
designing for forces generated from wind and/or seismic events. Newer codes and standards only allow
the allowable stress increase to be taken when using an alternate set of load combinations. The table below
summarizes when allowable-stress increases are permitted.
1/3 Allowable-Stress Increase for Structural Post-Installed Anchors

Building Code
2009 IBC/IRC
2003 IBC/IRC
2000 IBC/IRC
1997 UBC
Base Material
Is 1/3 Allowable Stress Increase Permitted for PostInstalled Anchors Designed with Traditional ASD?
Concrete1
N/A3
Masonry2
Yes4
N/A3
Masonry2
Yes4
Yes4
Masonry2
Yes4
Concrete1
Yes4
Yes4
Concrete
Concrete
Masonry
1. Concrete includes all concrete base materials such as reinforced concrete, concrete on metal deck and
precast concrete shapes.
2. Masonry includes all masonry base materials such as hollow and grout-filled CMU and unreinforced clay-brick
masonry.
3. Not applicable since this code does not use traditional ASD for post-installed anchors.
4. Only when indicated in the applicable load table in this catalog and when alternative basic load combinations as prescribed
in the code are used.
13
TREATMENT OF DESIGN METHODS
UNDER MODEL BUILDING CODES
Structural Post-Installed Anchor Selection Guide

Design Methods Covered
Adhesive
Anchors
Traditional
ASD1
ICC-ES
AC308
ASD
(SD & ASD)
SET-XP
Concrete
ETAG,
Annex C
Design
Method A
ET
Base Materials Covered
Cracked
Uncracked
Cracked
X3
X3
AT-HP
CMU
Uncracked
X5
Conc. over Mtl. Deck
KLP
GroutFilled
URM4
Hollow
Code
Listings2
ICC-ES,
ETAG
X3
ICC-ES,
AC308
X3
X6
X6
X6
ETAG
1. Allowable loads for traditional ASD are derived from applicable test methods such as ASTM E488, ASTM E1512 and legacy ICC-ES acceptance criteria AC58 and AC60.
2. Code listings may not be available for all products/applications cited in the table. To verify code listed products/applications refer to code reports at
www.strongtie.com.
3. Installed into top surface.
4. Unreinforced clay brick masonry.
5. ICC-AC308 pending, submitted 12/11.
6. Consult Simpson Strong-Tie for load data.
Mechanical
Anchors
Traditional
ASD1
ACI 318
App. D/
ICC-ES AC193
ASD
(SD & ASD)
Base Materials Covered
ETAG,
Annex C
Design
Method A
Concrete
Conc. over Mtl. Deck
Uncracked
Cracked
Uncracked
Cracked
CMU
GroutFilled
Hollow
ICC-ES
Pending
Torq-Cut
Strong-Bolt
ICC-ES
ICC-ES,
ETAG
Titen HD
Wedge-All
Sleeve-All
Drop-In
Blue Banger
Hanger
X
X
ICC-ES,
ETAG
FM, UL
1. Allowable loads for traditional ASD are derived from applicable test methods such as ASTM E488, ASTM E1512 and legacy ICC-ES acceptance criteria
AC01, AC70, and AC106.
2. Code listings may not be available for all products/applications cited in the table. To verify code listed products/applications refer to code reports at
www.strongtie.com or contact Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd.
14
Code
Listings2
FM, UL
Design Methods Covered
ADHESIVE ANCHORING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE: Always check expiration date on
product label. Do not use expired product.
WARNING: When drilling and cleaning hole use eye and lung
protection. When installing adhesive use eye and skin protection.
HOLE PREPARATION: Concrete, Brick, Hollow and Grout-Filled CMU

For horizontal, vertical and overhead applications. (ET and SET-XP, for AT-HP see page 26)
1. DrillDrill hole to
specified diameter
and depth.
2. BlowRemove dust
from hole with oil-free
compressed air for a
minimum of 4 seconds.
3. BrushClean with
a nylon brush for a
minimum of 4 cycles.
CARTRIDGE PREPARATION: For AT-HP, ET and SET-XP Adhesives
1. CheckCheck expiration
date on product label. Do
not use expired product.
Product is usable
until end of printed
expiration month.
2. OpenOpen
cartridge per
package
instructions.
4. InsertInsert cartridge
into dispensing tool.
3. AttachAttach proper
Simpson Strong-Tie
nozzle to cartridge.
Do not modify nozzle.
4. BlowRemove dust
from hole with oil-free
compressed air for a
minimum of 4 seconds.
5. DispenseDispense adhesive
to the side until properly mixed
(uniform color).
FILLING THE HOLE: Vertical Anchorage: For AT-HP, ET and SET-XP Adhesives
Prepare the hole per instructions Hole Preparation.
Dry and Damp Holes:

1. FillFill hole
- full,
starting from
bottom of hole
to prevent
air pockets.
Withdraw
nozzle as hole
fills up.
2. InsertInsert
clean, oil free
anchor, turning
slowly until the
anchor contacts
the bottom of
the hole.
3. Do not disturb
Do not disturb
anchor until
fully cured.
(See cure
schedule
for specific
adhesive.)
Threaded rod
or rebar
15
ADHESIVE ANCHORING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

FILLING THE HOLE: Horizontal and Overhead Anchorage: For AT-HP, ET and SET-XP Adhesives.
Threaded
rod or rebar
1. InstallInstall Simpson
ARC adhesive retaining
cap.
2. FillFill hole - full,

3. InsertInsert clean, oil-free anchor,
starting from bottom of
turning slowly until the anchor
hole to prevent air pockets.
contacts the bottom of the hole.
Withdraw nozzle as hole
fills up.
Threaded
rod or
rebar
4. Do not disturbDo not disturb

anchor until fully cured. (See cure
schedule for specific adhesive.)
FILLING THE HOLE: When Anchoring with Screens: For AT-HP and ET Adhesives.
2. InsertInsert adhesive
filled screen into hole.
3. InsertInsert clean, oil-free

anchor, turning slowly until
the anchor contacts the
bottom of the screen.
4. Do not disturbDo not

disturb anchor until
fully cured. (See cure
schedule for specific
adhesive.)
1. FillFill screen completely.

Fill from the bottom of the
screen and withdraw the
nozzle as the screen fills to
prevent air pockets. (Anchoring
screens tube: Close integral
cap after filling.)
CHEMICAL CAPSULES
FILLING THE HOLE: KLP Spin in Capsule
90
1. DrillDrill hole
and thoroughly
clean (brushing
and blowing).
16
2. InsertInsert
KLP capsule
into drilled hole.
3. Spin inSpin in RFB

stud to the embedment
depth marking using a
rotary hammer drill.
4. After the specified cure time,

install the fixture and apply
the recommended fastening
torque with a calibrated
torque-wrench.
EPOXY-TIE ANCHORING ADHESIVES
Simpson Strong-Tie
Epoxy-Tie adhesives
are ideal for:
Anchoring threaded rod, rebar,
smooth dowels, and anchors in
various base materials
Anchoring into concrete tension
zones with SET-XP adhesive
Simpson Strong-Tie
Epoxy-Tie anchoring
formulations:
SET-XP: Tested to AC308,
2009 IBC and ETAG,
requirements including high
performance in cracked and
uncracked concrete under
static and seismic loading
ET: General purpose highstrength anchoring, AC308 ICC
submitted 12/11
Dispensing systems
for Epoxy-Tie adhesives:
Cartridge size 650ml (22 ounces)
Manual and pneumatic dispensing
tools for maximum productivity
Simpson Strong-Tie EMN22i
nozzle for 650ml (22 ounces)
ET and SET-XP epoxy cartridges
ensures proper mixing and
convenience
17
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
ET Epoxy-Tie is a two-component, 100% solids Epoxy-Based System

for use a high strength, non-shrink anchor grouting material.
USES: Threaded rod anchoring
Rebar doweling
Bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete
Pick-proof sealant around doors, windows and fixtures
Paste-over for crack injection
- IMPORTANT SEE Pages 15-16

FOR INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
CODES: ICC-ES ER-4945 (URM); City of L.A. RR25185, RR25120;

Florida FL 11506.2; Multiple DOT Listings.
The load tables list values
based upon results from the most recent testing and may not reflect those
in current code reports. Where code jurisdictions apply, consult the current
reports for applicable load values. AC308 ICC Pending Submitted 12/11.
APPLICATION: Concrete
Grout-filled concrete block
hollow concrete block
solid brick and hollow bricks
FEATURES:
Economical and safe
Versatile: for use in concrete, brick and concrete block
Suitable for damp, suitable for clean water-filled holes with a reduction
factor of 0.60 applied to both tension and shear
Non-sag formulation: ideal for vertical and most overhead applications
Non-shrink
INSTALLATION: See pages 15-16.
STORAGE CONDITIONS: For best results store between 7C - 32C. To

store partially used cartridges, leave hardened nozzle in place. To re-use,
attach new nozzle.
COLOR: Resin white, hardener black
When properly mixed, ET adhesive will be a uniform medium gray color.
ET22
650 ml. Cartridge
Made in USA
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE: Very good to excellent against distilled water,

inorganic acids and alkalis. Fair to good against organic acids and alkalis,
and many organic solvents. Poor against ketones. For more detailed information visit our website or contact Simpson Strong-Tie.
EMN22i
Mixing Nozzle
ACCESSORIES: See pages 33-34 for information on dispensing tools,

mixing nozzles and other accessories.
ET Cartridge System
ET Epoxy
Capacity
ml (ounces)
Dispensing Tool
Mixing Nozzle
ET22
650 (22)
EDT22S/EDT22AP
EMN22i
Tested Properties
EDT22S
In-Service Temperature
Sensitivity
Property
Test Method
Results
Bond Strength Moist Cure
ASTM C 882
14 MPa (2 days)
29 MPa (14 days)
Compressive Yield Strength
ASTM D 695
63 MPa (24 hours)

92 MPa (7 days)
Consistency (25 )
ASTM C 881
Non-Sag
Thixotropic Paste
Water Absorption
ASTM D 570
Base
Percent
Material Temp Allowable Load
Base
Material
Temp
Full
Curing
TIme
100%
72 hrs
21
100%
16
24 hrs
43
100%
27
24 hrs
0.19% (24 hours)
57
85%
38
12 hrs
69%
58%
Compressive Modulus
ASTM D 695
4535 MPa (7days)
66
Heat Deflection
ASTM D 648
76
82
Gel Time (25 )
ASTM C 881
30 Minutes (then film)
1. Refer to in-service temperature

sensitivity chart for allowable load ( base on
bond strength ) reduction for temperature.
2. percent allowable load may be linearly
interpolated for intermediate base material
temperatures.
18
Cure Schedule
SHELF LIFE: 24 months from date of manufacture in unopened container
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
ET Epoxy Anchor Installation Information and Additional Data for Threaded Rod and Rebar in Normal-Weight Concrete1
Characteristic
Symbol
Nominal Anchor Diameter (in.) / Rebar Size
Units
/ #3
/ #4
/ #5
/ #6
/ #7
1 / #8
1 / #10
Installation Information
Drill Bit Diameter
dhole
in.
Maximum Tightening Torque
Tinst
ft-lb
10
20
30
45
60
80
125
Minimum
hef
in.
Maximum
hef
in.
10
12
15
hmin
in.
hef + 5do
cac
in.
2.5 x hef
Minimum Edge Distance
cmin
in.
Minimum Anchor Spacing
smin
in.
Permitted Embedment
Depth Range2
Minimum Concrete Thickness
Critical Edge Distance
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308.
2. Minimum and maximum embedment depths are listed in accordance with ICC-ES AC308 requirements.
ET Epoxy Anchor Tension Design Data for Threaded Rod and Rebar in Normal-Weight Concrete1,11
Characteristic
Symbol Units
/ #3 / #4 / #5 / #6 / #7
1 / #8 1 / #10
Steel Strength in Tension

Minimum Tensile Stress Area
Ase
in2
Tension Resistance of Steel - ASTM A193, Grade B7

Threaded
Rod
- ASTM F1554, Grade 36

- Type 410 Stainless (ASTM A193, Grade B6)
Nsa
lb.
- Type 304 and 316 Stainless (ASTM A193, Grade

B8 and B8M)
0.142
0.226
0.334
0.462
0.606
9,750
17,750
28,250
41,750
57,750
75,750 121,125
0.969
4,525
8,235
13,110
19,370
26,795
35,150
8,580
15,620
24,860
36,740
50,820
66,660 106,590
4,445
8,095
12,880
19,040
26,335
34,540
55,235
0.79
1.23
56,200
Ase
in2
0.11
0.20
0.31
0.44
0.60
Tension Resistance of Steel Rebar (ASTM A615,

Gradee 60)
Nsa
lb.
9,900
18,000
27,900
39,600
54,000
71,100 110,700
Concrete Breakout Strength in Tension (2,500 psi fc 8,000 psi)
0.658
Strength Reduction Factor - Steel Failure
Rebar
0.078
0.75
Strength Reduction Factor Steel Failure

Effectiveness Factor - Uncracked Concrete
Effectiveness Factor - Cracked Concrete
Strength Reduction Factor - Breakout Failure
kuncr
kcr
24
17
Bond Strength in Tension (2,500 psi fc 8,000 psi)
0.6510
Temp. Range 1
for Uncracked
Concrete2,4,5
Characteristic Bond Strength7
k,uncr
psi
1,590
1,535
1,485
1,435
1,380
1,330
1,225
Temp. Range 2
for Uncracked
Concrete3,4,5
Characteristic Bond Strength6,7
k,uncr
psi
435
420
405
395
380
365
335
Bond Strength in Tension Bond Strength Reduction Factors for Periodic or Continuous Special Inspection
Strength Reduction Factor - Dry Concrete
dry
0.659
Strength Reduction Factor - Water-saturated Concrete
sat
0.459
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with

the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308, except as modified below.
2. Temperature Range 1: Maximum short-term temperature of 110F
(43C). Maximum long-term temperature of 75F (24C).
3. Temperature Range 2: Maximum short-term temperature of 150F
(66C). Maximum long-term temperature of 110F (43C).
4. Short-term concrete temperatures are those that occur over short
intervals (diurnal cycling).
5. Long-term concrete temperature are constant temperatures over a
significant time period.
6. For anchors that only resist wind or seismic loads, bond strengths may
be multiplied by 2.25.
7. For anchors installed in overhead and subjected to tension resulting
from sustained loading, multiply the value calculated for Na according to
ICC-ES AC308 by 0.75.
8. The value of applies when the load combinations of ACI 318 Section
9.2 are used. If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used,
refer to Section D.4.5 to determine the appropriate value of.
9. The value of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318
Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for
Condition B are met. If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are
used, refer to Section D.4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
10. The value of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318
Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for
Condition B are met. If the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are
used and the requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for Condition A are met,
refer to Section D.4.4 to determine the appropriate value of . If the load
combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used, refer to Section D.4.5 to
determine the appropriate value of .
11. Sand-lightweight and all-lightweight concrete are beyond the scope of
this table.
19
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
ET Epoxy Anchor Shear Design Data for Threaded Rod in Normal-Weight Concrete1,5
Characteristic
Symbol Units
/ #3 / #4 / #5 / #6 / #7
1 / #8 1 / #10
Steel Strength in Shear

Ase
in2
Shear Resistance of Steel - ASTM A193, Grade B7

Threaded
Rod
- ASTM F1554, Grade 36

Vsa
lb.
- Type 304 and 316 Stainless (ASTM A193, Grade

B8 and B8M)
0.142
0.226
0.334
0.462
0.606
0.969
4,875
10,650
16,950
25,050
34,650
45,450
72,675
2,260
4,940
7,865
11,625
16,080
21,090
33,720
4,290
9,370
14,910
22,040
30,490
40,000
63,955
2,225
4,855
7,730
11,420
15,800
20,725
33,140
Minimum Shear Stress Area
Ase
in
0.11
0.20
0.31
0.44
0.60
0.79
1.23
Shear Resistance of Steel - Rebar (ASTM A615,

Grade 60)
Vsa
lb.
4,950
10,800
16,740
23,760
32,400
42,660
66,420
0.875
1.000
1.250
Rebar
0.078
Concrete Breakout Strength in Shear
Outside Diameter of Anchor
do
in.
Load Bearing Length of Anchor in Shear
in.
0.652
0.375
Concrete Pryout Strength in Shear
0.500
0.602
0.625
0.750
hef
0.703
Coefficient for Pryout Strength
kcp
2.0
Strength Reduction Factor - Pryout Failure
0.704
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308, except as modified below.
2. The value of applies when the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used. If the load combinations of AC 318 Appendix C are used, refer to
Section D.4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
3. The value of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for Condition B are
met. If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used and the requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for Condition A are met, refer to Section D.4.4 to
determine the appropriate value of . If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used, refer to Section D.4.5 to determine the appropriate value
of .
4. The values of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used and requirements of Section D.4.4(c) for Condition B are met. If
the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used, refer to Section D.4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
5. Sand-lightweight and all-lightweight concrete are beyond the scope of this table.
20
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
TENSION LOADS FOR METRIC THREADED ROD ANCHORS IN NORMAL-WEIGHT CONCRETE

Embed. Critical Critical
Depth
Edge Spacing
(mm)
Dist.
Dist.
(mm)
(mm)
Tension Load Based on

Bond Strength
Tension Load Based on Steel Strength
Rod
Dia.
(mm)
Drill
Bit
Dia.
(mm)
10
12
89
133
356
35.1
8.8
9.6
11.5
15.3
9.6
13.4
15.3
12
14
108
162
432
61.5
15.4
13.9
16.7
22.3
13.9
19.5
22.3
16
18
127
191
508
91.6
22.9
25.9
31.0
41.4
25.9
36.2
41.4
20
24
171
257
686
142.0
35.5
40.4
48.5
64.6
40.4
56.5
64.6
24
28
229
343
914
189.5
47.4
58.2
69.8
93.1
58.2
81.4
93.1
27
30
257
387
1029
247.6
61.9
75.8
91.0
121.3
75.8
106.1
121.3
30
35
286
429
1143
315.3
78.8
92.5
111.0
148.0
92.5
129.5
148.0
f'c 13.8 MPa

Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade 50 Grade 70 Grade 80
(2000 psi) Concrete
5.8
6.8
8.8
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Ultimate Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
Allowable load must be the lesser of the load based on bond strength or steel strength.
The allowable loads listed under bond strength are based on a safety factor of 4.0.
Allowable tension load based on steel strength = 0.33 x Fu x TSA. TSA = tensile stress area.
Allowable loads may not be increased for short-term loading due to wind or seismic forces.
Refer to allowable load adjustment factors for edge distance and spacing.
Refer to in-service temperature sensitivity chart for allowable load adjustment for temperature.
Anchors are permitted to be used within fire-resistive construction, provided the anchors resist wind or seismic loads only. For use in fire-resistive
construction, the anchors can also be permitted to be used to resist gravity loads, provided special consideration has been given to fire exposure
conditions.
8. Anchors are not permitted to resist tension forces in overhead or wall installations unless proper consideration is given to fire exposure and elevated
temperature conditions.
9. The minimum concrete thickness is equal to embedment depth + 5d.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SHEAR LOADS FOR METRIC THREADED ROD ANCHORS IN NORMAL-WEIGHT CONCRETE

Shear Load Based on
Shear Load Based on Steel Strength
Embed. Critical Critical Concrete Edge Distance
Depth
Edge Spacing
f'c 13.8 MPa
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade 50 Grade 70 Grade 80
(mm)
Dist.
Dist.
(2000 psi) Concrete
5.8
6.8
8.8
Stainless Stainless Stainless
(mm)
(mm)
Ultimate Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
Rod
Dia.
(mm)
Drill
Bit
Dia.
(mm)
10
12
89
133
133
33.9
8.5
4.9
5.9
7.9
4.9
6.9
7.9
12
14
108
162
162
50.1
12.5
7.2
8.6
11.5
7.2
10.0
11.5
16
18
127
191
191
87.0
21.8
13.3
16.0
21.3
13.3
18.6
21.3
20
24
171
257
257
123.2
30.8
20.8
25.0
33.3
20.8
29.1
33.3
24
28
229
343
343
240.0
60.0
30.0
36.0
47.9
30.0
41.9
47.9
27
30
257
387
387
263.7
65.9
39.0
46.9
62.5
39.0
54.7
62.5
30
35
286
429
429
287.2
71.8
47.7
57.2
76.2
47.7
66.7
76.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Allowable load must be the lesser of the load based on concrete edge distance or steel strength.
The allowable loads based on concrete edge distance are based on a safety factor of 4.0.
Allowable shear load based on steel strength = 0.17 x Fu x TSA. TSA = tensile stress area.
Allowable loads may not be increased for short-term loading due to wind or seismic forces.
conditions.
21
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
TENSION LOADS FOR METRIC REBAR DOWELS IN NORMAL-WEIGHT CONCRETE

Drill
Bit
Dia.
(mm)
12
16
16
20
20
25
25
30
28
32
35
40
Embed. Critical Critical

Depth
Edge Spacing
(mm)
Dist.
Dist.
(mm)
(mm)
Tension Load Based on Tension Load Based on

Bond Strength
Bond Strength
f'c 13.8 MPa
(2000 psi) Concrete
Ultimate Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
Tension Load Based on Steel Strength
fc 27.6 MPa
BS 4449
BS 4449
Grade II
Grade III
(4000 psi) Concrete
Grade 460B Grade 500B
Ultimate Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
108
162
432
70.4
17.6
17.6
152
229
610
81.1
20.3
127
191
508
101.8
25.4
25.4
238
359
953
118.1
29.5
171
257
686
167.4
41.9
41.9
286
429
1143
177.0
44.2
229
343
914
240.8
60.2
60.2
305
457
1219
73.1
381
572
1524
344.2
86.0
229
343
914
60.2
60.2
330
495
1321
85.3
429
645
1715
441.9
110.5
286
429
1143
283.0
70.7
70.7
381
572
1524
95.9
476
714
1905
484.3
121.1
31.2
31.2
37.4
37.4
55.5
55.5
66.6
66.6
86.7
86.7
104.0
104.0
135.5
135.5
162.5
162.5
169.9
169.9
203.8
203.8
222.0
222.0
266.2
266.2
1. Allowable load must be the lesser of the load based on bond strength or steel strength.
2. The allowable loads listed under bond strength are based on a safety factor of 4.0.
3. Allowable tension load based on steel strength for Grades II and III Rebar = (276 MPa) x Nom Cross Sectional Area
Allowable tension load based on steel strength for Grades 460B and 500B Rebar = (331 MPa) x Nom Cross Sectional Area
4. Allowable loads may not be increased for short-term loading due to wind or seismic forces.
5. Refer to allowable load adjustment factors for edge distance and spacing.
6. Refer to in-service temperature sensitivity chart for allowable load adjustment for temperature.
7. Anchors are permitted to be used within fire-resistive construction, provided the anchors resist wind or seismic loads only. For use in fire-resistive
conditions.
8. Anchors are not permitted to resist tension forces in overhead or wall installations unless proper consideration is given to fire exposure and elevated
temperature conditions.
SHEAR LOADS FOR METRIC REBAR DOWELS IN NORMAL-WEIGHT CONCRETE

Rebar
Size
(mm)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drill
Bit
Dia.
(mm)
Embed.
Depth
(mm)
12
16
16
Shear Load Based on

Concrete Edge Distance
Critical
Edge
Dist.
(mm)
Critical
Spacing
Dist.
(mm)
108
203
162
60.3
20
127
254
191
20
25
171
305
25
30
229
406
28
35
257
32
40
286
f'c 17.2 MPa

(2500 psi) Concrete
Ultimate
Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
Shear Load Based on Steel Strength

BS 4449 Grade BS 4449 Grade
460B
500B
Allowable
Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
Grade II
Grade III
Allowable
(kN)
Allowable
(kN)
15.1
9.8
11.5
9.5
10.4
93.0
23.3
17.4
20.5
16.9
18.5
257
134.1
33.5
27.2
32.0
26.4
28.8
343
236.2
59.0
42.6
50.1
41.3
45.1
457
387
283.9
71.0
53.4
62.8
51.8
56.5
508
429
368.2
92.1
69.7
82.0
67.7
73.8
Allowable load must be the lesser of the load based on concrete edge distance or steel strength.
The allowable loads based on concrete edge distance are based on a safety factor of 4.0.
Allowable shear load based on steel strength = 0.17 x Fu x TSA. TSA = tensile stress area.
Allowable loads must be decreased by 12 percent for short-term loading due to wind or seismic forces.
conditions.
22
Rebar
Size
(mm)
SET-XP Structural Epoxy-Tie Anchoring Adhesive for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete
SET-XP is a 1:1 two component, high solids epoxy-based anchoring
adhesive formulated for optimum performance in both cracked and
uncracked concrete. SET-XP adhesive has been rigorously tested in
accordance with ICC-ES AC308, 2009 IBC and ETAG requirements and
has proven to offer increased reliability in the most adverse conditions,
including performance in cracked concrete under static and seismic
loading. SET-XP adhesive is teal in color in order to be identified as a
high-performance adhesive for adverse conditions. Resin and hardener
are dispensed and mixed simultaneously through the mixing nozzle.
SET-XP adhesive exceeds the ASTM C881 specification for Type I and
Type IV, Grade 3, Class C epoxy.

FOR INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
USES: When SET-XP adhesive is used with the RFB anchor, all
thread rod or rebar, the system can be used in tension and
seismic zones where there is a risk of cracks occurring that
pass through the anchor location. It is also suitable for
uncracked concrete conditions.
CODES: ICC-ES ESR-2508; City of L.A. pending; Florida FL 11506.5
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (313 cm2/1000 L).
The load tables list values
based upon results from the most recent testing and may not reflect
those in current code reports. Where code jurisdictions apply, consult the
current reports for applicable load values. ETA-11/0360.
APPLICATION: Surfaces to receive epoxy must be clean. The basematerial temperature must be 10 C or above at the time of installation.
For best results, material should be 2127 C at the time of application.
Cartridges should not be immersed in water to facilitate warming.
To warm cold material, the cartridges should be stored in a warm,
uniformly-heated area or storage container for a sufficient time to allow
epoxy to warm completely. Mixed material in nozzle can harden in 57
minutes at a temperature of 4 C or above.
INSTALLATION: See pages 15-16.

SHELF LIFE: 24 months from date of manufacture in unopened side-byside cartridge.
STORAGE CONDITIONS: For best results, store between 732 C. To
attach new nozzle.
COLOR: Resin white, hardener black-green. When properly mixed,
SET-XP adhesive will be a uniform teal color.
CLEAN UP: Uncured material Wipe up with cotton cloth. If desired,
scrub area with abrasive, waterbased cleaner and flush with water. If
approved, solvents such as ketones (MEK, acetone, etc.), lacquer thinner
or adhesive remover can be used. DO NOT USE SOLVENTS TO CLEAN
ADHESIVE FROM SKIN. Take appropriate precautions when handling
flammable solvents.
Solvents may damage surfaces to which they are applied.
Cured Material chip or grind off surface.
Cure Schedule
Base Material
Temerature
Cure Time
C
10
72 hrs.
21
24 hrs.
32
24 hrs.
43
24 hrs.
TEST CRITERIA: Anchors installed with SET-XP Epoxy-Tie adhesive

have been tested in accordance with ETA-11/0360 and ICC-ESs
Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements (AC308) for the following:
Seismic and wind loading in cracked and uncracked concrete
Static tension and shear loading in cracked and
uncracked concrete
Horizontal and overhead installations
Long-term creep at elevated-temperatures
Static loading at elevated-temperatures
Damp holes
Freeze-thaw conditions
Critical and minimum edge distance and spacing
SET-XP Material Property
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE: Very good to excellent against distilled water,

in-organic acids and alkalis. Fair to good against organic acids and
alkalis, and many organic solvents. Poor against ketones. For more
detailed information visit our website or contact Simpson Strong-Tie.
SET-XP Cartridge System

EMN22i
SET-XP Adhesive
PROPERTY
EDT22S
TEST METHOD
RESULTS
Consistency
ASTM C881
Passed, non-sag
Glass transition temperature
ASTM E1356
68
Bond strength (moist cure)
ASTM C882
26MPa (2 days)
Water absorption
ASTM D570
0.10%
Compressive yield strength
ASTM D695
102.3MPa
Compressive modulus
ASTM D695
4442MPa
Gel time
ASTM C881
49 minutes
Model No.
Capacity
ml
(ounces)
Cartridge
Type
SET-XP22
650
(22)
side-by-side
Carton Dispensing
Quantity
tool(s)
10
EDT22S,
EDT22AP
Mixing
Nozzle
EMN22i
23
SET-XP Epoxy Anchor Installation Information and Additional Data for Threaded Rod and Rebar in NormalWeight Concrete1
Characteristic
Drill Bit Diameter
Maximum Tightening Torque
Permitted Embedment Depth (hef)
Range2
Minimum Concrete Thickness
Critical Edge Distance
Minimum Anchor Spacing
Symbol
Minimum
Maximum
Units
d
mm
Tinst
N-M
mm
mm
mm
hmin
mm
cac
mm
cmin
mm
smin
12.7
15.9
54
70
254
Nominal Anchor Diameter (mm)

15.9
19.1
22.2
19.1
122
79
318
22.2
176
89
381
2.25 x hef
3 x hef
44
76
25.4
271
95
445
25.4
29
407
102
508
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308.
2. Minimum and maximum embedment depths are set so as to fit the ICC-ES AC308 design model.
SET-XP Epoxy Tension Design Data for Threaded Rod and Rebar in Normal-Weight Concrete1
Symbol Units
Nominal Anchor Diameter (mm) / Rebar Size

12.7
15.9
19.1
22.2
25.4
Steel Strength in Tension

mm2
92
146
215
Ase
78,988 125,713 185,788
Tension Resistance of Steel - ASTM A193, Grade B7
36,646
58,340
86,197
- ASTM A307, Grade C
Threaded
Nsa
N
Rod
69,509 110,627 163,493
47,393
75,428 111,473
0.75
mm2
129
200
284
Ase
N
80,100 124,155 176,220
Nsa
Rebar
Tension Resistance of Steel - Rebar (ASTM A615, Grade 60)
0.65
Concrete Breakout Strength in Tension15
kuncr
24
Effectiveness Factor - Uncracked Concrete
17
kcr
Effectiveness Factor - Cracked Concrete
0.65
Bond Strength in Tension (17.2MPa f'c 55.2MPa)
16.7
15.6
13.4
Characteristic
Bond
Strength
k,uncr MPa
Temp. Range 1
70
79
89
for Uncracked
Minimum
hef
mm
Permitted Embedment Depth Range
Concrete
254
318
381
Maximum
MPa
7.2
5.0
6.9
k,cr
Temp. Range 1 Characteristic Bond Strength
102
127
152
for Cracked
Minimum
mm
hef
Concrete
254
318
381
Maximum
8.6
8.1
6.9
k,uncr MPa
70
79
89
for Uncracked
Minimum
hef
mm
Concrete
254
318
381
Maximum
MPa
3.7
2.6
3.6
k,cr
102
127
152
for Cracked
Minimum
hef
mm
Concrete
254
318
381
Maximum
Bond Strength in Tension - Bond Strength Reduction Factors for Continuous Special Inspection
dry, ci
0.65
0.45
sat, ci
Ksat, ci
0.57
Additional Factor for Water-saturated Concrete
Bond Strength in Tension - Bond Strength Reduction Factors for Periodic Special Inspection
dry, pi
0.55
sat, pi
0.45
Ksat, pi
0.48
Additional Factor for Water-saturated Concrete
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308
2. Temperature Range 1: Maximum short-term temperature of 110F. Maximum long-term temperature of 24
3. Temperature Range 2: Maximum short-term temperature of 150F. Maximum long-term temperature of 44
24
298
256,988
119,238
226,149
154,193
391
337,088
156,418
296,637
202,253
387
240,300
510
316,395
11.5
95
445
4.3
178
445
5.9
95
445
2.2
178
445
13.8
102
508
6.7
203
508
7.1
102
508
3.5
203
508
Characteristic
SET-XP Epoxy Shear Design Data for Threaded Rod and Rebar in Normal-Weight Concrete
Characteristic
Symbol Units
Steel Strength in Shear
Ase
mm2

Shear Resistance of Steel - ASTM A193, Grade B7
- ASTM A307, Grade C
Vsa

Threaded
Rod
Reduction for Seismic Shear - ASTM A307, Grade C6
Reduction for Seismic Shear - ASTM A193, Grade B76
Nominal Anchor Diameter (mm) / Rebar Size

12.7
15.9
19.1
22.2
25.4
92
146
215
298
387
47,393
75,428
111,473
154,193
202,253
21,983
34,999
51,731
71,556
93,851
41,697
66,350
98,078
135,681
178,000
28,434
45,257
66,884
92,516
121,352
0.71
0.71
V,seis
Ase
mm2
129
Shear Resistance of Steel - Rebar (ASTM A615, Grade 60)
Vsa
48,060
V,seis
0.80
0.602
Reduction for Seismic Shear - Stainless (ASTM A193, Grade B6)6
0.80
0.80
Reduction for Seismic Shear - Stainless (ASTM A193, Grade B8)6
Rebar
Reduction for Seismic Shear - Rebar (ASTM A615, Grade 60)6

Outside Diameter of Anchor

Load Bearing Length of Anchor in Shear
Coefficient for Pryout Strength

Strength Reduction Factor - Pryout Failure
Concrete Breakout Strength in Shear

do
mm
e
mm
387
510
74,493
105,732
144,180
189,837
22.2
25.4
15.9
19.1
hef
Concrete Pryout Strength in Shear

kcp
-
12.7
200
0.652
284
0.703
7
2.0
0.704
1. The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ICC-ES AC308, except as modified below.
2. The value of applies when the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used. If the load combinations of AC 318 Appendix C are used,
refer to Section D4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
3. The value of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D4.4(c) for Condition B are met.
If the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D4.4(c) for Condition A are met, refer to Section D4.4 to determine
the appropriate value of . If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used, refer to Section D4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
4. The value of applies when both the load combinations of ACI 318 Section 9.2 are used and the requirements of Section D4.4(c) for Condition B are met.
If the load combinations of ACI 318 Appendix C are used, refer to Section D4.5 to determine the appropriate value of .
5. Sand-lightweight and all-lightweight concrete are beyond the scope of this table.
6. The values of Vsa are applicable for both cracked and uncracked concrete. For anchors installed in regions assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E
or F, Vsa must be multiplied by V,seis for the corresponding anchor material.
7. The values of f'c used for calculation purposes must not exceed 55.1 MPa (8,000 psi) for uncracked concrete. The value of f'c used for calculation purposes
must not exceed 17.2 MPa (2500 psi) for cracked concrete when calculating concrete pryout strength in shear.
25
SET-XP Epoxy Anchor Installation Data (ETA-11/0360)
Characteristic
Symbol
Nom.thread rod diameter

Drill hole diameter
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Embedment depth and drill hole depth

Diameter of clearance hole in the fixture
Installation torque
Nom. rebar diameter
Drill hole diameter
Embedment depth and drill hole depth
Threaded Rod/
Rebar
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Units
M12/12
d
mm
do
mm
hef,min
mm
hef,max
df
mm
Tinst,max
Nm
d
mm
mm
do
hef,min
mm
hef,max
Threaded Rod/ Rebar

M16/14 M20/16 M24/20
12
14
70
240
14
40
12
16
70
240
Minimum thickness of concrete member
hmin
mm
hef +30 mm
100 mm
Minimum allowable spacing

Minimum allowable edge distance
Minimum allowable edge distance
smin
cmin
smin
cmin
mm
mm
mm
mm
45
80
45
80
16
18
80
320
18
60
14
18
75
280
20
24
90
400
22
80
16
20
80
320
60
100
50
90
70
115
60
100
M27/25
24
28
100
480
26
100
20
25
90
400
27
30
110
540
30
120
25
32
100
500
80
135
70
115
90
155
80
135
hef + 2do
SET-XP Epoxy Characteristic values of resistance to tension loads. Design method TR 029
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Steel failure
NRk,s
NRk,s
Ms1)
Characteristic resistance, Steel grade 5.8

Characteristic resistance; Steel grade 8.8
Partial safety factor
Characteristic resistance,
Stainless steel A4 and HCR,
property class 50 (>M24) and 70 (M24)
Units
M12/12
non-cracked Temperature range I: 43C / 24C4)

concrete
Temperature range II: 65C / 43C4)
Temperature range I: 43C / 24C4)
cracked
Increasing factor for Rk,p in nonconcrete
cracked and cracked concrete
Threaded Rod/ Edge distance (splitting)

Rebar
Center spacing (splitting)
Threaded Rod
Rebar
1) In absence of other national regulations
2) The partial safety factor 2 = 1.4 is included
3) The partial safety factor 2 = 1.2 is included
Threaded Rod/ Rebar

M16/14 M20/16 M24/20
M27/25
kN
kN
-
42
67
79
126
123
196
1.5
177
282
230
367
NRk,s
kN
59
110
172
247
230
Ms
1.87
Characteristic tension resistance for B500 acc. DIN

NRk,s
kN
62
488-2:2009-085)
Ms1)
Combined pull-out and concrete cone failure
12
d
mm
Nom.diameter
12
Characteristic bond resistance (C20/25)
17
non-cracked Temperature range I: 43C / 24C4)
Rk,ucr
N/mm
concrete
16
6
Temperature range I: 43C / 24C4)
Rk,cr
N/mm
5.5
C30/37
cracked
Increasing factor for Rk,p in nonc
concrete
C40/50
cracked and cracked concrete
C50/60
Mp=Mc1)
26
Symbol
Rk,ucr
N/mm
Rk,cr
N/mm
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
Mp=Mc1)
Splitting failure
mm
ccr,sp
mm
scr,sp
c
Msp1)
13.5
12.5
5
4.5
85
2.86
111
173
270
1.4
16
14
20
16
24
20
27
25
10
9.5
4.5
4.5
10
9.5
3
3
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.12)
9
8.5
3
3
7
6.5
3
3
8
7.5
3.5
3.5
8
7.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.02
1.04
1.83)
7
6.5
2.5
2.5
5.5
5
2.5
2.5
3 x hef
2 x ccr,sp
2.12)
1.83)
4) Maximum short and long term temperatures

5) For reinforcement bars that do not comply with DIN 488: The characteristic resistance NRk,s
shall be determined acc. Technical Report TR 029, equation (5.1)
Characteristic
SET-XP Epoxy Characteristic values of resistance to shear loads. Design method TR 029
Characteristic
Symbol
Units
Steel failure without lever arm

kN
VRk,s
VRk,s
kN
Ms1)
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Threaded Rod
Rebar
Characteristic resistance for B500 acc.
DIN 488-2:2009-083)
VRk,s
kN
Ms1)
VRk,s
kN
Steel failure with lever arm

M0Rk,s
Nm
Nm
M0Rk,s
Ms1)
Characteristic resistance for B500 acc.
DIN 488-2:2009-084)
Factor in equation ( 5.7 ) acc. 5.2.3.3

Threaded Rod/ of TR 029 for Design of Bonded Anchors
Rebar
M12/12
Threaded Rod/ Rebar

M16/14 M20/16 M24/20
21
34
39
63
61
98
1.25
88
141
115
184
30
55
86
124
115
1.56
31
42
Nm
Ms1)
M0Rk,s
Nm
Ms1)
Concrete pry-out failure
k
Concrete edge failure

See section 5.2.3.4 of the Technical Report TR 029 for the Design of Bonded Anchors
Threaded Rod/
Mc1)
mm
Rebar
1)
Mcp
2.38
55
1)
Ms
M0Rk,s
M27/25
86
135
1.5
66
105
166
266
325
519
1.25
561
898
832
1332
92
233
454
786
832
1.56
112
178
2.38
265
518
1012
1.5
2
1.5
1.52)
1) In absence of other national regulations

2) The partial safety factor 2 = 1,0 is included
3) For reinforcing bars that do not comply with DIN 488: The characteristic resistance VRk,s shall be determined acc. Technical report TR 029, equation (5.5)
4) For reinforcing bars that do not comply with DIN 488: The characteristic resistance M0Rk,s shall be determined acc. Technical report TR 029, equation (5.6b)
27
EPOXY-TIE Estimating Guides

Estimating Guide for 650ml Cartridge using Threaded Rod Installations per Cartridge
Rod
Dia.
(mm)
Drill
Bit Dia.
(mm)
10
12
16
20
22
22
25
29
32
32
12
14
18
22
25
29
29
32
35
38
THREADED ROD IN SOLID BASE MATERIAL

HOLE DEPTH (mm)
51
110
126
62
30
42
25
35
30
27
17
76
73
84
42
20
28
17
23
20
18
12
102
55
63
31
15
21
13
17
15
13
9
127
44
51
25
12
17
10
14
12
11
7
152
37
42
21
10
14
8
12
10
9
6
178
31
36
18
9
12
7
10
9
8
5
203
27
32
16
8
11
6
9
7
7
4
229
24
28
14
7
9
6
8
7
6
4
254
22
25
12
6
8
5
7
6
5
3
279
20
23
11
5
8
5
6
5
5
3
305
18
21
10
5
7
4
6
5
4
3
330
17
19
10
5
6
4
5
5
4
3
356
16
18
9
4
6
4
5
4
4
2
381
15
17
8
4
6
3
5
4
4
2
406
14
16
8
4
5
3
4
4
3
2
432
13
15
7
4
5
3
4
4
3
2
457
12
14
7
3
5
3
4
3
3
2
483
12
13
7
3
4
3
4
3
3
2
508
11
13
6
3
4
3
3
3
3
2
Tables are estimations.

Actual usage may vary
depending on waste.
Estimating Guide for 650ml Cartridge using Rebar Installations per Cartridge
Drill
Bit Dia.
(mm)
10
12
16
20
25
28
32
39
12
14
20
22
29
32
38
48
REBAR IN SOLID BASE MATERIAL

HOLE DEPTH (mm)
51
131
192
65
57
49
44
23
11
76
87
128
44
38
33
29
16
7
102
65
96
33
29
25
22
12
6
127
52
77
26
23
20
18
9
4
152
44
64
22
19
16
15
8
4
178
37
55
19
16
14
13
7
3
203
33
48
16
14
12
11
6
3
229
29
43
15
13
11
10
5
2
254
26
38
13
11
10
9
5
2
279
24
35
12
10
9
8
4
2
305
22
32
11
10
8
7
4
2
330
20
30
10
9
8
7
4
2
356
19
27
9
8
7
6
3
2
381
17
26
9
8
7
6
3
1
406
16
24
8
7
6
6
3
1
432
15
23
8
7
6
5
3
1
457
15
21
7
6
5
5
3
1
483
14
20
7
6
5
5
2
1
508
13
19
7
6
5
4
2
1

depending on waste.
Estimating Guide for 650ml Cartridge and Plastic Screen Tubes Installations per Cartridge
28
Rod
Dia.
(mm)
Drill
Bit Dia.
(mm)
10
12
16
19
14
16
22
25
THREADED ROD INSERTED IN SCREEN TUBE

HOLE DEPTH (mm)
89
57
30
20
15
102
50
26
18
13
127
40
21
14
10
152
34
17
12
9
178
29
15
10
7
203
25
13
9
6
229
22
12
8
6
254
20
10
7
5
279
305
330
356
381
406
432
457
483
508
533
6
5
6
4
5
4

depending on waste.
Rebar
Size
(mm)
AT-HPTM ADHESIVE
THE ONLY ONE...
Constant Viscosity:
Dispenses easily at
almost any temperature,
without the need to
warm the cartridge
Fast Cure:
Even in the coldest
conditions, cure time
is measured in hours,
not days
Typical Applications
Include:
Rebar doweling and
Threaded-rod anchoring
Non-Sag Formulation:
Ideal for vertical,
horizontal, and most
overhead applications
High Strength Formula:

Premium structural
adhesive for demanding
applications
Versatile:
For use in concrete,
brick or concrete block
Multiple Sizes:
Available in 380ml and
825ml cartridges.
ETAG Approved:
ETA-11/0150, ETA-11/0151
Made in Europe
29
AT-HPTM
High Strength Anchoring Adhesive
AT-HP is 2 component styrene free methacrylate resin suitable for high

performance fixing applications of threaded rod and rebar into concrete.
Easy to dispense and fast curing. Specially designed for structural
fixings.
USES:
CODES:
Rebar
Structural steel
Facade
Threaded rod anchoring

Balconies
ETA for threaded rod (Option 8)

ETA for rebar
DT825 Tool
ETA-11/0150
ETA-11/0151
Certification
body
N 0679
Plant France
07
ETAG 001-5 Option 8

M8-M20
ETA-11/0139
ETAG001-TR023
M8-M32
WRAS
MA3404/E
0706528
CTSB (France) Fire Test Report Pending Due April, 2012

APPLICATION: Concrete
Grout-filled concrete block
Hollow concrete block
Solid brick and hollow bricks
FEATURES: Fast curing
Low odor
Non-flammable
INSTALLATION: See page 15~16
STORAGE CONDITIONS: For best results store between 7C - 32C. To

attach new nozzle.
MN1 Nozzle
COLOR: Resin white, hardener black

When properly mixed, AT-HP adhesive will be a uniform medium gray
color.

FFOR INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
CURING SCHEDULE: Let anchor fully cure without disturbing.
Temp C
0
10
20
30
Working time
45 min
10 min
6 min
30 sec
AT-HP
825 ml
Curing time
150 min
105 min
50 min
30 min
R 120
METHOD OF CLEANING HOLES:
Normal diameter
Method of cleaning hole
All diameter
2 blowings
+ 2 brushings
+ 2 blowings
+ 2 brushings
+ 2 blowings
CLEAN UP:
Observe these safety precautions (Contains dibenzoyl peroxide):
R52/53 Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse
effects in the aquatic environment (A). R43 May cause sensitisation
by skin contact (B). R7 May cause fire (B). S3/14 Keep in a cool place
away from-combustible or reducing materials-acids-oxidation catalysts
(B). S36/37/39 Wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye/face
protection (B). S7 Keep container tightly closed (B).
30
AT-HPTM Cartridge Systems

Model #
Contents
Weight
Carton Qty
AT-HP 380
380 ml
0.8 kg
12
AT-HP 825
825 ml
1.7 kg
* Includes 2 mixing nozzles per cartridge.
SHELF LIFE: 24 months from date of manufacture in unopened cartridge.
AT-HPTM
Material: Carbon steel, Grade 5.8, zinc plated and blue passivated; A4-70 stainless steel / AT-HPTM
TECHNICAL DATA FOR THREADED ROD

Installation Parameters
Characteristic
Drill Hole Diameter
Drill Hole Depth
Clearance Hole in The Fixture
Width Across Flats
Installation Torque
Symbol
Units
M8
M10
M12
M16
d0
h0
df
sw
Tinst
mm
mm
mm
mm
Nm
10
12
14
18
64
96
80
120
9
13
10
96
144
12
17
20
128
14
19
40
M20
22
192
160
240
22
30
150
18
24
80
Spacings, Edge Distances and Member Thicknesses

Effective Embedment Depth
Characteristic Spacing 4)
Minimum Spacing
Characteristic Edge Distance 4)
Minimum Member Thickness
Symbol
Units
hef
Scr,N
Smin
Ccr,N
Cmin
hmin
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Nm
M8
64
128
35
64
35
100
M10
96
192
48
96
48
130
80
160
40
80
40
110
M12
120
240
60
120
60
150
96
192
48
96
48
130
144
288
72
144
72
175
M16
128
256
64
128
64
160
M20
192
384
96
192
96
225
160
320
80
160
80
200
240
480
120
240
120
280
Recommended Values for Resistance to Tension and Shear Loads
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
hef
64
Steel A4
kN
12.7 13.6 12.7 13.6 19.9 19.9 20.0 21.6 26.6 26.6 28.8 30.9 39.9 39.9 54.3 57.8 50.0 50.0 76.6 76.6
96
Steel A4
80
Steel A4
120
Steel A4
96
Steel A4
144
Steel A4
128
Steel A4
192
Steel A4
160
Steel A4
240
Steel A4
Permissible Tension Loads1) in Non-Cracked Concrete3) C20/25 - C50/60, Nperm
Permissible Shear Loads1)2) in Non-Cracked Concrete3) C20/25 - C50/60, Vperm

kN
6.3
8.12
6.3
8.12 10.1 12.9 10.1 12.9 14.6 18.9 14.6 18.9 27.2 35.1 27.2 35.1 42.4 54.9 42.4 54.9
Permissible Shear Loads1)2) in Non-Cracked Concrete3) C20/25 - C50/60, Vperm

kN
12.6 16.7 12.6 16.7 25.9 33.3 25.9 33.3 45.4 58.9 45.4 58.9 116.8 149.2 116.8 149.2 224.7 292.3 224.7 292.3
31
AT-HPTM
TECHNICAL DATA FOR REBAR

Installation Parameters
Characteristic
Drill bit diameter
Brush diameter
Minimum anchorage length1)
Minimum anchorage length: overlap joint2)
Maximum anchorage depth
Symbol
Units
do
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
lb,min
lo,min
lv,max
Rebar Diameter [mm]

8
12
17
115
200
400
10
14
20
145
200
500
12
16
30
170
200
600
14
18
30
200
210
700
16
20
30
230
240
800
20
25
35
285
300
1000
25
30
32
355
375
1000
28
35
37
600
630
1000
32
40
42
685
720
1000
1) Minimum anchorage length for anchoring rebar: lb,min=1.5 x max {0.3 x lb,rqd; 10; 100mm}
2) Minimum lap length for overlap joint: lo,min = 1.5 x max {0.3 x 6 x lb,rqd; 15; 200mm}
Design Values of the Ultimate Bond Resistance According to EN 1992-1-1
6)
C12/15
C16/20
C20/25
C25/30
C30/37
C35/45
C40/50
C45/55
C50/60
8/10/12
14/16
20/25
28
32
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.7
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.0
3.7
3.7
3.4
3.4
3.0
4.0
4.0
3.4
3.4
3.4
4.3
4.0
3.7
3.4
3.4
* The values given in Table 7 are valid for "good bond conditions" according to EN 1992-1-1.
For all other conditions the values shall be multiplies by 0.7.
* Minimum concrete cover: Cmin = 30 + 0.06 lv 2 x [mm]
Minimum clear spacing between two post-installed rebars: a = 40mm 4 x
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approvals and a partial safety factor for actions . The permissible loads are valid
for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10 mm or smaller.
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c 10 hef and 60d) concrete edge failure must be checked
per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A.
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile stress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verification R = 3 N/mm can be assumed (L equals the tensile
stress within the concrete as a result of external loads, forces on anchors included).
4) If spacings or edge distances become smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N and/or c ccr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A must be performed. For
details, see approvals ETA-11/0150 and ETA-11/0151.
5) Minimum anchorage length for anchoring rebar: lb,min = 1.5 x max {0.3 x lb,rqd; 10 ; 100 mm}
Minimum lap length for overlap joint: l0,min = 1.5 x max {0.3 x 6 x lb,rqd; 15 ; 200 mm}.
The values given in the Table are valid for "good bond conditions" according to EN 1992-1-1. For all other conditions the values shall be multiplied by 0.7.
6) Minimum concrete cover: Cmin = 30+0.06 lv 2 x [mm]
Minimum clear spacing between two post-installed rebars: a = 4 mm 4 x .
32
Ultimate Bond Resistance, fbd, N/mm2
Rebar
diameter (mm)
AT-HPTM
Design Values for Anchoring Rebar (fyk = 500 N/mm2; C20/25; fbd = 2.3 N/mm2)
1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 1.0
Anchorage
Length lbd
Tension
Load
Mortar
Volume V
Anchorage
Length lbd
Tension
Load
Mortar
Volume V
[mm]
[mm]
115
200
280
360
380
145
200
300
400
475
170
240
360
480
500
570
200
280
420
560
665
230
320
480
640
760
285
400
600
800
945
355
500
750
1000
600
840
1000
685
700
1000
[kN]
6.6
11.6
16.2
20.8
21.9
10.5
14.5
21.7
28.9
34.1
14.7
20.8
31.2
41.6
43.4
49.1
20.2
28.3
42.5
56.6
67.0
26.6
37.0
55.5
74.0
87.4
41.2
57.8
86.7
115.6
136.5
64.1
90.3
135.5
180.6
121.4
169.9
202.3
158.4
161.9
231.2
[ml]
9
15
21
27
29
13
18
27
36
43
18
25
38
51
53
60
24
34
51
68
80
31
43
65
87
103
60
85
127
170
200
92
130
194
259
249
349
416
372
380
543
[mm]
115
200
265
145
200
300
330
170
240
360
400
200
280
420
465
230
320
480
530
285
400
600
662
355
500
750
830
600
840
930
685
700
1000
[kN]
9.5
16.5
21.9
15.0
20.6
31.0
34.1
21.1
29.7
44.6
49.1
28.9
40.5
60.7
67.0
38.0
52.9
79.3
87.4
58.8
82.6
123.9
136.5
91.6
129.0
193.5
213.3
173.4
242.8
267.7
226.3
231.2
330.3
[ml]
9
15
20
13
18
27
30
18
25
38
42
24
34
51
56
31
43
65
72
60
85
127
140
92
130
194
215
249
349
387
372
380
543
10
12
14
2 or 5 = 0.7; 1 =3 =4 = 1.0
Rebar
diameter
16
20
25
28
32
* The given values are valid for "good bond condition" according to EN 1992-1-1. For all other conditions the values shall be multiplied by 0.7.
The volume of mortar can be calculated using the equation: V=1.2 x (do2 - d2) x x lbd /4
33
AT-HPTM
Design Values for overlapping joint (fyk = 500 N/mm2; C20/25; fbd = 2.3 N/mm2)
2 or 5 = 0.7; 1 =3 =4 = 1.0
Lap
Length lbd
Tension
Load
Mortar
Volume V
Lap
Length lbd
Tension
Load
Mortar
Volume V
[mm]
[mm]
200
280
360
380
200
300
400
475
200
240
360
480
500
570
210
280
420
560
665
240
320
480
640
760
300
400
600
800
945
375
500
750
1000
630
840
1000
720
900
1000
[kN]
11.6
16.2
20.8
21.9
14.5
21.7
28.9
34.1
17.3
20.8
31.2
41.6
43.4
49.1
21.2
28.3
42.5
56.6
67.0
27.7
37.0
55.5
74.0
87.4
43.3
57.8
86.7
115.6
136.5
67.7
90.3
135.5
180.6
127.5
169.9
202.3
166.5
208.1
231.2
[ml]
15
21
27
29
18
27
36
43
21
25
38
51
53
60
25
34
51
68
80
33
43
65
87
103
64
85
127
170
200
97
130
194
259
262
349
416
391
489
543
[mm]
200
265
200
300
330
200
240
360
400
210
280
420
465
240
320
480
530
300
400
600
662
375
500
750
830
630
840
930
720
900
1000
[kN]
16.5
21.9
20.6
31.0
34.1
24.8
29.7
44.6
49.1
30.3
40.5
60.7
67.0
39.6
52.9
79.3
87.4
61.9
82.6
123.9
136.5
96.8
129.0
193.5
213.3
182.1
242.8
267.7
237.8
297.3
330.3
[ml]
15
20
18
27
30
21
25
38
42
25
34
51
56
33
43
65
72
64
85
127
140
97
130
194
215
262
349
387
391
489
543
10
12
14
16
20
25
28
32
* The given values are valid for "good bond condition" according to EN 1992-1-1. For all other conditions the values shall be multiplied by 0.7.
The volume of mortar can be calculated using the equation: V=1.2 x (do2 - d2) x x lbd /4
34
1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 1.0
Rebar
diameter
ADHESIVE ACCESSORIES
Adhesive Dispensing Tools
Each tool has been designed to work with Epoxy-Tie cartridges for trouble-free dispensing. These tools are for use with SET-XP, ET, ETI 650ml
adhesives.
EDT22S
Manual Dispensing Tool for 650ml Epoxy-Tie Adhesive Cartridges
The EDT22S epoxy adhesive tool features a steel carriage and is
engineered for high-volume, continuous use, delivering maximum
performance for all 650ml Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems
adhesives.
FEATURES:
26:1 thrust ratio delivers maximum dispensing power
Double-gripping plates eliminates drive rod slippage
Cartridges snap into place for better alignment
All steel construction for durability
EDT22S
EDT22AP
Pneumatic Dispensing Tool for 650ml Cartridges

The EDT22AP has an ergonomically designed nylon handle that
includes a flow rate adjustment. This lightweight tool (2.73kg) also
features a power piston return.
EDT22AP
DT TOOLS
Manual Tools for AT-HP Dispensing
Name
Code
Qty. Box
Carton
Qty.
For use with

Cartridge size
Extrusion tool DT380
DT380
380 ml
Extrusion tool DT825
DT825
10
825 ml
DT380
High quality steel rod
Reinforced cradle
Quick release tab for
easy cartridge removal
DT825
Ergonomic handle
Maintenance tips, troubleshooting and repair parts schematics available at

www.simpsonstrongtie.com.
35
ADHESIVE ACCESSORIES
Mixing Nozzles and Other Items
EMN22I
An 18-element mixing nozzle for use with 650ml Epoxy-Tie
cartridges. This is a one piece nozzle with integrated nut (separate
retaining nut not required).
EMN22i
MN1
For use with AT-HP. Two included with each AT-HP Cartridge
MN1
ADHESIVE RETAINING CAPS

Adhesive retaining caps make overhead and horizontal installation
easier by preventing the adhesive from running out of the hole.
They also center the rod in the hole, making them ideal for
applications where precise anchor placement is required.
It may be necessary to provide support for the insert during
cure time. Adhesive retaining caps are not designed to support
the weight of the insert in overhead installations.
ARC
Material: Plastic
The X cut in the cap allows the mixing nozzle and insert to pass
through, while containing the adhesive in the hole.
PLASTIC ADHESIVE - ANCHORING SCREEN TUBES

Screen tubes are vital to the performance of adhesive anchors in
base materials that are hollow, or contain voids, such as hollow
block and brick. The Simpson Strong-Tie plastic screen tube
provides the economical advantage of a plastic screen tube while
providing performance comparable to steel screen tubes and better
than competitive plastic screen tubes.
SW
HOLE CLEANING BRUSHES

Brushes are used for cleaning drilled holes prior to adhesive anchor
installation. Brushes have a twisted wire handle with nylon bristles
and are available in a variety of diameters.
BLOW-OUT PUMP FOR HOLE CLEANING

Manual blow pump ideal for cleaning dust out of drilled holes
before applying epoxies, capsules or installing mechanical anchors.
36
ETB
KLP
Chemical Capsule
KLP CHEMICAL CAPSULES

Styrene free methylmetacylate system
Spin-in Capsules are a well known and reliable means for anchoring rods in solid
materials such as concrete, rocks, etc..
USES: Anchoring threaded rod and rebar in solid base materials including
Brackets
Base plates
Railings
Steel construction
Storage racks
Machines
SPECIAL FEATURES:
1 capsule 4 1 hole = 0 mistake!
Spin-in Capsules are designed specially for anchoring threaded rods for high
performance and demanding applications
Fast cure, clean with no waste
Easy to use and reliable
High capacity in non-cracked concrete
Made in Europe
APPLICATION: Holes to receive adhesive must be clean and free of concrete dust
and/or dirt, oil or grease. For dependable results, adhesive should be applied in dry
conditions. Do not install in or through standing water. The base material must be
-5 or above at the time of installation. ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION!
MATERIAL:
KLP: Glass capsule with resin, hardener and mineral aggregates
BASE MATERIAL: Non-cracked concrete C20/25 to C50/60 (B25 to B55)

INSTALLATION: After drilling and cleaning the hole, the capsule is inserted into
the hole and the anchor stud is driven with a rotating/hammering action. This
breaks the capsule and mixes the contents. The resulting chemical reaction creates
a durable expansion pressure free bond between the anchor stud, the reacted
resin, and the concrete.
SHELF LIFE:
24 months from date of manufacture in original packaging.
STORAGE OF KLP:
Dry, dark, at a temperature between 5 and 25. Avoid direct sunlight.
CLEAN UP:
If Broken - Allow for material to cure.
Cured Material - Clip or grind off surface.
CURING SCHEDULE: Let anchor fully cure without disturbing.
Curing time
> -5
300 min
>0
60 min
> 10
20 min
> 20
10 min
RFB
Threaded stud
KLP
Capsule
37
KLP
Chemical Capsule
Installation: During installation, the capsule is crushed and the rotating and hammering action mixes the contents.
After the recommended cure time, the fixture can be installed and the fixing can be loaded.
90
Drill hole and

thoroughly clean
(brushing and blowing)
After the specified cure

time, install the fixture
and tighten the washer
and nut
Type
Drill Bit Diameter
Length
T (Torque max.) Nm
Service loads kN,

C20/25
M8
10
85
10
M10
12
85
20
M12
14
95
30
10
M16
18
95
60
15
M20
25
175
120
27
M22
25
185
160
32
M24
28
210
200
37
M27
M30
32
35
270
270
300
400
48
60
M32
Available
Upon
Request
Type
Drill Bit Diameter
Length
Qty Box
Carton Qty.
M8
10
85
10
500
M10
12
85
10
500
M12
14
95
10
500
M16
18
95
10
500
M20
25
175
120
M22
25
185
120
M24
28
210
120
M27
M30
32
270
126
35
270
36
M32
Available
Upon
Request
Glass Chemical Capsule

Made In Europe
KLP CAPSULE
38
Spin in RFB stud to the

embedment depth
marking using a rotary
hammer drill
Insert KLP capsule into

drilled hole
RFB
Threaded Stud
RFB Threaded Stud with hex head,

hex nut and washer
RFB's are pre-cut threaded rod, supplied with a nut and washer. For use with Simpson Strong-Tie adhesives and chemical capsules.
RFB Carbon steel

Material: A5.8 white zinc carbon steel, 1 setting tool included in each box
Type
RFB10 x 130-HS
RFB12 x 160-HS
RFB12 x 215-HS
RFB16 x 190-HS
RFB16 x 230-HS
RFB16 x 260-HS
RFB16 x 300-HS
RFB20 x 200-HS
RFB20 x 260-HS
RFB20 x 300-HS
RFB24 x 300-HS
RFB27 x 340-HS
Diameter
Length
Box
Quantity
[mm]
M10
M12
M12
M16
M16
M16
M16
M20
M20
M20
M24
M27
[mm]
130
160
215
190
230
260
300
200
260
300
300
340
[pcs]
40
40
25
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
5
20
Diameter
Length
Box
Quantity
[mm]
M10
M12
M16
M20
M20
[mm]
130
160
100
200
260
[pcs]
40
40
10
10
10
Any size available by special order, please contact Simpson
RFB Stainless steel

Material: A4 Stainless steel, 1 setting tool included in each box
Type
RFB10 x 130-SS316
RFB12 x 160-SS316
RFB16 x 190-SS316
RFB20 x 200-SS316
RFB20 x 260-SS316
Any size available by special order, please contact Simpson
39
CRACK REPAIR ADHESIVE SYSTEM

Crack repair in concrete
does not have to require
expensive equipment
Dual cartridge ETI epoxies
for use with manual or
pneumatic dispensing tools
Mixing nozzles, ports
and other injection
accessories to simplify
the repair process
No mixing or measuring
required with no leftover
material as waste to dispose of.
Products to handle your
toughest applications:
Seal the crack against

moisture: protect flooring
and guard rebar in the
concrete from rust
Restore integrity: high
strength, structural repairs
Protect steel rebar
Repair and extend the
life of the structure
Crack-Pac Flex H2O

Polyurethane Injection Adhesive
Flexible crack sealer
Expands to fill cracks
and voids
For dry, wet and actively
leaking cracks
Single tube product can
dispensed with a standard
caulking tool
40
Structurally repair the crack
ETI
Injection Epoxy
ETI injection epoxies are specially designed formulations for the

injection and repair of cracks in concrete. ETI epoxies are twocomponent, 1:1 ratio, high solids formulations. They are available in
650ml side-by-side cartridges and are dispensed through a static mixing
nozzle using a manual or pneumatic dispensing tool. ETI is available
in two viscosities: ETI-LV (low viscosity) and ETI-GV (gel viscosity) to
handle a wide range of crack widths. Properly installed, they provide a
repair that is both waterproof and high strength (structural).
FEATURES:
Chemically bonds with the concrete to provide a structural repair
(meets the requirements of ASTM C-881 as a structural repair epoxy)
Seals the crack from moisture, protecting rebar in the concrete from
corrosion and moisture damage
Both viscosities formulated for maximum penetration under pressure
Side-by-side cartridge dispensing provides reliable mixing and ratio
control when used with the New Simpson Strong-Tie Opti-Mix
static mixing nozzle
Eliminates the need for expensive bulk dispensing equipment.
Either formulation can be dispensed using a manual or pneumatic
dispensing tool (ETI-LV requires the use of the Opti-Mix nozzle,
model EMNO22, which is included with the cartridge)
Black and white components allow easier verification of mixing than
systems utilizing same color components. The mixed epoxy is gray
for a better color match with the concrete for exposed conditions
Suitable for pressure injection or gravity-feed applications.
Non-shrink material resistant to oils, salts and mild chemicals
ETI-LV
ETI-GV
ETI-LV Low Viscosity Injection Epoxy

Low viscosity epoxy (1790 cps) for repair of fine to medium width
cracks 0.4~6.4mm in width
Low surface tension allows the material to effectively penetrate
narrow cracks
Suitable for structural repairs
ETI-GV Gel Viscosity Injection Epoxy
Gel viscosity epoxy for repair of medium cracks 2.4~6.4 mm width.
Decreases in viscosity under pressure for increased flowability.
Suitable for structural repairs.
APPLICATION: Epoxy-Tie injection epoxies are suitable for repairing
non-moving cracks in concrete walls, floors, slabs, columns and beams.
They can be used to inject cracks in damp or wet conditions with
excellent results. Apply to concrete 4C or above. For best results, warm
material to 15C or above prior to application.
SHELF LIFE: 2 years in unopened cartridge
STORAGE CONDITIONS: For best results, store between 5C-35C
COLOR: Resin- white, hardener- black. When properly mixed the
adhesive will be a uniform gray color.
CLEAN UP: Removal of cured adhesive Chip or grind off surface.
Uncured Adhesive Wipe up with cotton cloths. If desired, scrub area
with abrasive, waterbased cleaner and flush with water. If approved,
solvents such as ketones (MEK, acetone, etc.), lacquer thinner, or
adhesive remover can be used. DO NOT USE SOLVENTS TO CLEAN
ADHESIVE FROM SKIN.
Take appropriate precautions when handling flammable solvents.
Solvents may damage surface to which they are applied.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
ETI Cartridge System

Model
No.
Capacity
ml
(ounces)
Cartridge
Type
Carton
Quantity
Dispensing
Tool
Mixing
Nozzle
650
(22)
side-by-side
10
EDT22S,
EDT22AP
EMNO22
(included)
ETILV22
ETIGV22
ETI Material Property

Property
Test Method
Viscosity (24)
Bond strength
(moist cure)
2 days
14 days
Results
ETI-LV
ETI-GV
ASTM D2393 1790CPS(24) Non-sag gel

ASTM C882
17.2MPa
7.6MPa
17.5MPa
27.5MPa
ETI-LV: Meets the requirements of ASTM C-881

Type I, II, IV and V, Grade 1, Classes B & C.
Approved under NSF/ANSI Standard 61
Tensile strength (7 days)
ASTM D638
51.5MPa
Tensile elongation at break
ASTM D638
9.4%
ETI-GV: Meets the requirements of ASTM C-881

Type I, II, IV and V, Grade 3, Classes B & C.
Compressive yield strength

(7 days)
ASTM D695
86.1MPa
79.8MPa
Compressive modulus
ASTM D695
2358.6MPa
2780.7MPa
Deflection temperature
ASTM D648
54
55
Water absorption (24 hours)
ASTM D570
0.76%
0.58%
Linear coefficient of shrinkage ASTM D2566
0.004
0.000
ACCESSORIES: See page 45 for information on

mixing nozzles, parts, fittings and paste over material.
Gel time
ASTM C881
120 min
135 min
Initial cure(22)
24 hrs
24 hrs
41
EPOXY-TIE CRACK REPAIR
Method Statement
Important: These instructions are intended as recommended guidelines. Due to the variability of field conditions,
selection of the proper material for the intended application and installation are the sole responsibility of the applicator.
Materials
ETI-LV for repair of fine to medium-width cracks
(Suggested width range: 0.4mm6mm).
ETI-GV for repair of medium-width cracks
(Suggested width range: 2.4mm6mm)
E-Z-Click injection ports, fittings and other suitable accessories.
Sealing of the Crack and Attachment of E-Z-Click injection ports

1. To adhere the port to the concrete, apply a small
amount of epoxy around the bottom of the
1
port base. Place the port at one end of the
crack and repeat until the entire crack is
ported. As a rule of thumb, injection ports
should be placed 200mm apart along the length
of the crack.
Important: Do not allow epoxy to block
the port or the crack under it, this is
where epoxy must enter the crack.
2. Using a putty knife or other paste-over
tool, generously work epoxy along the
entire length of the crack. Take care to
mound the epoxy around the base of the
port to approximately 6mm thick extending
25mm out from the base of the port and to
work out any holes in the material. It is
recommended that the paste-over should
be a minimum of 5mm thick and 25mm wide
along the crack. Insufficient paste-over will
result in leaks under the pressure of injection.
If the crack passes completely through the
concrete element, seal the back of the crack,
if possible. If not, epoxy may be able to run
out the back side of the crack, resulting
in an ineffective repair.
Preparation of the Crack for Injection

Clean the crack and the surface surrounding it to allow the epoxy to bond to
sound concrete. At a minimum, the surface to receive paste-over should be
brushed with a wire brush. Oil, grease or other surface contaminates must
be removed in order to allow the paste-over to bond properly. Take care
not to impact any debris into the crack during cleaning. Using clean, oil free
compressed air, blow out the crack to remove any dust, debris or standing
water. Best results will be obtained if the crack is dry at the time of injection.
If water is continually seeping from the crack, the flow must be stopped in
order for epoxy injection to yield a suitable repair. Other materials such as
polyurethane resins may be required to repair an actively leaking crack.
For many applications, additional preparation is necessary in order to seal
the crack. Where a surfacing material has been removed using an acid or
chemical solvent, prepare the crack as follows:
1. Using clean, compressed air, blow out any remaining debris and liquid.
2. Remove residue by high-pressure washing or steam cleaning.
3. Blow any remaining water from the crack with clean compressed air.
1.1
3. Allow the paste-over to harden before

beginning injection.
If a coating, sealant or paint has been applied to the concrete it must be

removed before placing the paste-over epoxy. Under the pressure of injection
these materials may lift and cause a leak. If the surface coating is covering the
crack, it may be necessary to route out the opening of the crack in a V shape
using a grinder in order to get past the surface contamination.
Injection Procedure for ETI-LV and ETI-GV Injection Epoxy

1. Follow cartridge preparation instructions on the cartridge label. Verify
that the material flowing from the Opti-Mix mixing nozzle is a uniform
gray color for ETI-LV and ETI-GV.
2. Attach the E-Z-Click fitting to the end of the nozzle by pushing the
tubing over the barbs at the end of the nozzle. Make sure that all ports
are pushed in to the open position.
3. Attach the E-Z-Click injection fitting to the
first E-Z-Click port until it clicks into place.
Make sure that the heads of all the ports are
pushed in to the open position. In vertical
applications, begin injection at the lowest
port and work your way up. In a horizontal
application start at one end of the crack
and work your way to the other end.
4. Inject epoxy into the first port until it will no
longer flow into the crack. If epoxy shows at
the next port and the first port still accepts
material, close the second port and continue
to inject into the first port until it accepts no
more epoxy. Continue closing ports where
epoxy appears until the first port refuses
epoxy. When the first port reaches the point
of refusal, brace the base of the port and pull
out gently on the head of the port to close it.
42
Pulling too hard may dislodge the port from the surface of the
concrete, causing a leak. Depress the metal tab on the head of
the E-Z-Click fitting and remove it from the port.
5. Go to the last port where epoxy appeared while injecting the first port,
open it, and continue injection at this port. If the epoxy has set up and
the port is bonded closed, move to the next clean port and repeat the
process until every portion of the crack has refused epoxy.
While this method may appear to leave some ports uninjected, it provides
maximum pressure to force the epoxy into the smaller areas of the crack.
Moving to the next port as soon as epoxy appears will allow the epoxy to
travel along the wider parts of the crack to the next ports rather than force
it into the crack before it travels to the next ports.
Injection Tips
If using a pneumatic dispensing tool, set the tool at a low setting
when beginning injection and increase pressure if necessary to get
the epoxy to flow.
For narrow cracks it may be necessary to increase the pressure
gradually until the epoxy begins to flow. It may also be necessary to wait
a few minutes for the epoxy to fill the crack and travel to the next port.
If desired, once the injection epoxy has cured, remove the injection ports
and paste-over epoxy. The epoxy can be removed with a chisel, scraper,
or grinder. Using a heat gun to soften the epoxy is recommended when
using a chisel or scraper.
Mixing nozzles can be used for multiple cartridges as long as the
epoxy does not harden in the nozzle.
Epoxy injection is an economical method of repairing non-moving cracks

in concrete walls, slabs, columns and piers and is capable of restoring the
concrete to its pre-cracked strength. Prior to doing any injection it is necessary
to determine the cause of the crack. If the source of cracking has not been
determined and remedied, the concrete may crack again.
EPOXY-TIE CRACK
Injection Guide
Use this guide as an estimate of the amount of Simpson

epoxy material you will need for your repair job.
This is an estimate only and your actual usage may vary
depending on the extent and depth of the crack.
Make sure back side of crack in the concrete is properly
sealed to avoid injected material running through and being
wasted.
ETI-LV: Meets the requirements of ASTM C-881 Type I, II, IV
and V, Grade 1, Classes B & C.
Approved under NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (safe for contact with
potable water).
ETI-GV: Meets the requirements of ASTM C-881 Type I, II, IV
and V, Grade 3, Classes B & C.
Crack Injection Material Usage Estimation Guide
Millimeter
crack width
(mm)
0.4
0.8
1.6
3.2
4.8
Concrete
Thickness
(mm)
Meters lineal
coverage
per 650 ml
102
14.5
152
9.7
204
7.2
254
Millimeter
crack width
(mm)
Concrete
Thickness
(mm)
Meters lineal
coverage
per 650 ml
102
0.9
152
0.6
204
0.4
5.8
254
0.4
300
4.9
300
0.3
102
7.3
102
0.7
152
4.8
152
0.5
204
3.6
204
0.4
254
2.9
254
0.3
300
2.4
300
0.2
102
3.6
102
0.6
152
2.4
152
0.4
204
1.8
204
0.3
254
1.4
254
0.2
300
1.2
300
0.2
102
1.8
102
0.5
152
1.2
152
0.4
204
0.9
204
0.3
254
0.7
254
0.2
300
0.6
300
0.2
102
1.2
102
0.5
152
0.8
152
0.3
204
0.6
204
0.2
254
0.5
254
0.2
300
0.4
300
0.1
6.4
9.5
11.1
12.2
43
CRACK-PAC FLEX-H2O Polyurethane Crack Sealer

Crack-Pac Flex-H20 is a high solids hydrophobic polyurethane injection resin
designed to seal leaking cracks, voids or fractures in concrete or solid masonry.
The polyurethane is packaged in the cartridge and an accelerator is packaged in the
nozzle. When the two are combined in the cartridge and mixed, the result is a low
viscosity, water activated polyurethane. When the resin encounters water as it is
injected into the crack, it becomes an expanding foam that provides a flexible seal
in leaking and non-leaking cracks.
FEATURES:
Seals seeping or mildly leaking cracks
400% elongation provides a flexible seal for moving cracks
Can be dispensed with a standard caulking tool
Can also be used on dry cracks
Can be used with a reduced amount or without accelerator to slow
down reaction time
Expands to fill voids and close off the back of the crack
Expanding nature makes it suitable for sealing cracks in solid masonry
Fast reacting - reaction begins within 1 minute after exposure to moisture;
expansion may be completed within 3 minutes (depending on the amount
of moisture and the ambient temperature).
Non-shrinking hydrophobic formula with the elongation
and flexibility of a hydrophilic resin
20:1 expansion ratio (unrestricted rise) means less material needed
APPLICATION: Suitable for sealing cracks ranging from 0.8mm to 6.4mm wide in
concrete and solid masonry. Can be used to repair cracks in dry, damp and
wet conditions with excellent results. Designed to perform in applications
where water is seeping or mildly leaking from the crack.
For Leaking Cracks

Crack-Pac Flex-H2O
Crack Sealer
Dispensing System: U.S. Patents
6,737,000 and 6,896,001 B2
SHELF LIFE: 12 months from the date of manufacture, unopened.

STORAGE CONDITIONS: For best results store in a dry area between 7- 35C.
Product is very moisture sensitive.
COLOR: Polyurethane - clear, accelerator - green, cured - green
CLEAN UP: Uncured material Wipe up with cotton cloths. If desired scrub area
with abrasive, waterbased cleaner and flush with water. If approved, solvents
such as ketones (MEK, acetone, etc.), lacquer thinner, or adhesive remover can be
used. DO NOT USE SOLVENTS TO CLEAN ADHESIVE FROM SKIN. Take appropriate
precautions when handling flammable solvents. Solvents may damage surfaces to
which they are applied. Cured material scrape or brush off surface with a putty
knife or wire brush. Tip: wetting the concrete or masonry surface immediately
prior to injection will make cured resin easier to remove.
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O Kit

(CPFH09KT)
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O Material Property

Property
Test Method
Results
Viscosity (25)
ASTM D 1638
600 cps (liquid state)
Density
ASTM D 1622
Elongation
ASTM D 638
Tensile strength
ASTM D 638
Tear strength
ASTM D 624
1041kg/m3 (Highly restricted rise)

160kg/m3 (Lightly restricted rise)
400%
(Highly restricted rise)
400%
(Lightly restricted rise)
15MPa
2 MPa
2.7MPa
0.4MPa
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O
Kit Components
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O Cartridge System
Capacity
ml
(ounces)
Model
No.
CPFH09
CPFH09KT
266
(9)
532
(18)
Cartridge
Type
Carton
Quantity
Dispensing
Tool(s)
single
12
single
2 (kits)
High Quality
Standard
Caulking
Tool
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O Bulk Packaging
44
Model
No.
Description
FHO5*
Flex-H2O
Resin
Flex-H2O
Catalyst
Capacity
18.9 L
473ml
Dispensing
Tool/Equipment
Bulk Pump/Meter Mix
Machine or Grease Gun
(by others)
USAGE TEMPERATURE: 15 - 32C
CRACK-PAC FLEX-H2O Method Statement

Application
Polyurethane injection is an effective and economical method of sealing
cracks in concrete and solid masonry elements. Crack-Pac Flex-H20 crack
sealer is suitable for sealing dry, wet, seeping and mildly leaking cracks in
horizontal and vertical concrete and solid masonry elements ranging from
0.8mm - 6mm.
Definitions:
Dry Cracka crack containing no moisture
Wet Cracka crack containing moisture (damp or containing standing
water). The surface can be dried and will remain dry during the
paste-over operation.
Seeping Cracka wet crack that slowly oozes water. After being dried,
the surface slowly becomes wet again.
Mildly Leaking Cracka crack with a slow trickle of water emitting
from its face.
NOTE: Multiple applications may be necessary to fill all voids.
Dry or Wet Crack Application - Sealing of the crack and attachment

of E-Z-Click flush mount injection ports (Model EIP-EZ or EIP-EZA)
1. To adhere the port to the concrete,
apply a small amount of epoxy around
the bottom of the port base. Place the
port at one end of the crack and repeat
until the entire crack is ported. As a rule
of thumb, injection ports should be placed
20cm apart along the length of the crack.
Important: Do not allow epoxy to block
the port or the crack under it, this is
where adhesive must enter the crack.
2. Using a putty knife or other paste-over
tool, generously work epoxy along the
entire length of the crack. Take care to
mound the epoxy around the base of
ports and to work out any holes in the
material. It is recommended that the
paste-over should be a minimum of 3mm
thick and 25mm wide. Insufficient paste-over
will result in leaks under the pressure of
injection. Allow the paste-over to cure
before beginning injection.
Preparation of the Crack for Injection

Clean the crack and the surface surrounding it to allow the paste-up
material to bond to sound concrete. At a minimum, the surface to receive
paste-over should be brushed with a wire brush. Oil, grease or other surface
contaminates must be removed in order to allow the paste-over to bond
properly. Take care not to impact any debris into the crack during cleaning.
With dry cracks, use clean, oil free compressed air to blow out as much
dust and debris from the crack.
For many applications, additional preparation is necessary in order to seal
the crack. Where a surfacing material has been removed using an acid or
chemical solvent, prepare the crack as follows:
1. Using clean, compressed air, blow out any remaining debris and
liquid.
2. Remove residue by high-pressure washing or steam cleaning.
3. Blow any remaining water from the crack with clean compressed air.
If a coating, sealant or paint has been applied to the concrete it must be
removed before placing the paste-over material. Under the pressure of
injection these materials may lift and cause a leak. If the surface coating is
covering the crack, it may be necessary to route out the surface of the crack
in a "V" shape using a grinder in order to get past the surface contamination.
Seeping Crack Application - Sealing of the crack and attachment

of E-Z-Click flush mount injection ports (Model EIP-EZ)
1. Mix a small amount of quick-setting hydraulic cement with water in a

container per manufacturer's recommendation (leave cement thick so
it can be molded). Apply the cement generously to the top of the port
flange and hold the port onto the concrete/masonry surface at one end
of the crack until it sticks when the hand is released (usually about
1 minute). Repeat until the entire crack is sealed and ported.
IMPORTANT: Be sure not to cover the port opening/closing interface
with the cement. If this interface is covered, the cement must be
cut away from this interface with a utility knife once it is cured,
otherwise, the port will not close.
1.1
2. To seal the remaining portions of the crack, mix small amounts of the
hydraulic cement and apply it to the crack in a similar fashion. It is
recommended that the paste-over be 5mm thick and 25mm
wide. Once the entire crack is covered, all leaking water should be
directed through the open ports. If water is leaking from any parts of
the paste-over, be sure to patch these areas with additional hydraulic
cement before injecting the crack.
Mildly Leaking Crack Application - Sealing of the crack and
attachment of E-Z-Click drill-in injection ports (Model EIPX-EZ)
3. For Dry Cracks- Crack-Pac Flex-H20 reacts

with water and needs moisture present
to cure. Therefore, if the crack to be sealed
is completely dry, water must be introduced
into it. Once ports are in place and the crack
surface is pasted over, use a syringe or
spray bottle to introduce approximately
1 ounce of water into each port.
Note: CIP and CIP-F and ETR epoxies are a
fast cure, manually mixed materials and may
harden prematurely if left in a mixed mass on
the mixing surface while installing ports.
Spreading paste-over into a thin film (approximately 3mm)
on the mixing surface will slow curing by allowing
the heat from the reaction to dissipate.
1. Using a hammer drill or roto-hammer, drill 16mm wide holes 19mm

deepat each end of the crack and along the crack approximately 20cm
apart.
2. Using the E-Z-Click Drilled-In port (model EIPX-EZ), gently pound the
port into the drilled hole at the top of a vertical crack or at either end
of a horizontal crack. Mix a small amount of quick-setting hydraulic
cement with water in a container per manufacturer's recommendation
(leave cement thick so it can be molded).
3. Apply the cement generously to the top of the port flange and hold
until it sticks when the hand is released (usually about 1 minute).
Repeat until the entire crack is sealed and ported. IMPORTANT: Be
sure not to cover the port opening/closing interface with the cement. If
this interface is covered, the cement must be cut away from this
interface with a utility knife once it is cured, otherwise, the port will
not close.
4. To seal the remaining portions of the crack, mix small amounts of the
hydraulic cement and apply it to the crack in a similar fashion. Starting
at one end and working toward the other. In vertical applications start
at the top and work down. It is recommended that the paste-over be at
least 5mm thick and 25mm wide. Once the entire crack is covered,
all leaking water should be directed through the open ports. If water is
leaking from any parts of the paste-over, be sure to patch these areas
with additional hydraulic cement before injecting the crack.
45
CRACK-PAC FLEX-H2O Method Statement

Injection Procedure for Crack-Pac Flex-H20 crack sealer
5. Move to the next port and repeat until all ports have been injected.
1. Follow cartridge preparation instructions on the cartridge label. Verify

that the material flowing from the nozzle is a uniform green color.
2. Attach the E-Z-Click fitting to the end of the nozzle by pushing the
tubing over the barbs at the end of the nozzle. Make sure that all ports
are pushed in to the open position.
3. Attach the E-Z-Click injection fitting to the
first E-Z-Click port until it clicks into place.
Make sure that the head of the port is
pushed in to the open position. In vertical
applications, begin injection at the lowest
port and work your way up. In a horizontal
application start at one end of the crack
and work your way to the other end.
4. Inject polyurethane into the first port until

material shows at the next port. Remove
the E-Z-Click fitting by bracing the base
of the port and pulling out gently on the
head of the port to close it. Pulling too
hard may dislodge the port from the
surface of the concrete, causing a leak.
Depress the metal tab on the head of
the E-Z-Click fitting and remove it from
the port.
Injection Tips
For narrow cracks it may be necessary to increase the pressure
gradually until the polyurethane begins to flow. It may also be
necessary to wait a few minutes for the material to fill the crack
and travel to the next port.
If desired, once the polyurethane has cured, remove the injection
ports and paste-over epoxy or hydraulic cement. The paste-over
can be removed with a chisel, scraper or grinder.
Troubleshooting
Polyurethane is flowing into the crack, but not showing up
at the next port.
This can indicate that either the crack expands and/or branches off
under the surface of the concrete. Continue to inject and fill these voids.
paste-over to begin to harden. If the leak is large (e.g. the port broke
off of the concrete surface) it is a good idea to wait approximately
30 minutes, or longer as necessary, to allow the paste-over to cure
more completely. Check to see that the paste-over is hard before
reinjecting or the paste-over or ports may leak.
Another option for small leaks is to clean off the injection adhesive
and use paraffin or crayon to seal the holes.
Back pressure is preventing polyurethane from flowing.

This can indicate several situations:
The crack is not continuous and the portion
being injected is full.
The port is not aligned over the crack properly.
The crack is blocked by debris.
More polyurethane is being used than estimated.

This may indicate that the crack either expands or branches off below
the surface. Continue to inject and fill these voids.
Polyurethane is leaking from the pasted-over crack

or around injection ports.
Stop injecting. If using a fast cure paste-over material (ETR or CIP),
wipe off the leaking injection epoxy with a cotton cloth and re-apply the
paste over material. Wait a approximately 1015 minutes to allow the
Less polyurethane is being used than estimated.

This may indicate that the crack is shallower than originally thought,
or the polyurethane is not penetrating the crack sufficiently before
moving to the next port.
Crack Repair Adhesive Suitability Matrix

Application / Feature
ETI-LV
Crack-Pac Flex-H2O
Seals the crack against moisture
YES
YES
Restores strength to the concrete
YES
NO
Expands to fi ll voids
NO
YES
Flexible (allows crack movement)
NO
YES
Suitable to seal cracks in masonry
NO
YES
Suitable for dry and wet crack
YES
YES
Suitable for cracks actively leaking water
NO
YES
NSF Approved
Suitable installation procedure(s)
Dispensing Tool
46
YES
NO
Pressure injection or gravity feed
Pressure injection
Manual: EDT22S
Pneumatic: EDT22AP
High Quality
Standard caulking tool
CRACK REPAIR ACCESSORIES

Simpson Strong-Tie is an ISO 9001-2000 registered company. ISO 9001-2000 is an
internationally-recognized quality assurance system which lets our domestic and
international customers know that they can count on the consistent quality of Simpson
Strong-Tie's products and services
EDT22S
Manual Dispensing Tool for 650ml Cartridges

The EDT22S features a molded fiber reinforced nylon body for ultimate
strength and light weight. The handle is positioned under the cartridge
for balance and ease of use. The drive mechanism is released by pushing forward on the drive handle.
Opti-Mix Mixing Nozzle
Specifically designed for crack injection epoxies and ensures

thorough mixing of epoxy components. Testing shows that mixing
with the Opti-Mix nozzle is 4 times more consistent than a standard
spiral mixing nozzle. For ETI formulas only.
EIP-EZ Flush Mount Port
EZ-Click Ports perform while pasted to the surface of the concrete.

No drilling required for most applications. After injecting, simply pull
the head of the E-Z-Click Port out to close it and prevent leakage.
EDT22AP
Pneumatic Dispensing Tool for 650ml Cartridges

The EDT22AP has an ergonomically designed nylon handle that
includes a flow rate adjustment. This lightweight tool (2.7kg) also
features a power piston return.
E-Z-Click Ports and Injection Fitting
The E-Z-Click Injection System is comprised of a specially designed

fitting and ports that take the mess out of your repair project while
allowing you to work faster. Positive connection eliminates messy
leakage; minimizing waste and clean-up.
EIPX-EZ Corner Mount/Drilled-in Port
EIPX-EZ ports are intended to use as a surface mount port in corners and drilled-in port on flat surfaces. They work the same way
as regular EIP-EZ Flush Mount Ports.
ETR-Epoxy Paste
Ideal for pasting over the surface of cracks and attaching ports for
pressure injection. The non-sag paste consistency enables pasteup on horizontal, and vertical and overhead applications. Fast cure
time means shorter time between paste-over and injection. Hand
mix and apply. Total size = 473ml. (Part A + Part B)
47
MECHANICAL ANCHORS
General purpose anchors for
any base material:
Concrete
Concrete block
(grouted and hollow)
Brick
Optimum performance
under static tension and
shear loading
Proven results under
Seismic and Wind loading
Ideal for demanding
structural applications
European Technical Approval

Option 1
Liebig heavy duty undercut

anchors for concrete and
masonry
Extremely high load capacities
Anchoring in cracked and
uncracked concrete with the
highest safety requirements.
Made in Europe
European Technical Approval

Option 1
48
High-performance anchors
designed and tested for use in
cracked or uncracked concrete
TITEN HD Heavy Duty Screw Anchor for Concrete and Masonry

The proprietary design of the threads on the Titen HD anchor hold the key to its
performance. During installation, hardened cutting teeth at the tip of the anchor
undercut the concrete allowing the rest of the threads to follow with very little
friction. The result is a continuous mechanical interlock between the anchor and
base material that requires little installation torque.
ETA-12/0060
ETAG 001-1 Option 1
APPLICATION:
Structural Steel
Strut and Pipe Hangers
Subway Cassions
Junction Boxes and Control Panels
Machinery and Equipment
Tilt-up Panel Braces
Concrete Formwork and Bracing
Material Handling: Racking, Mezzanines, Conveyors
Access Equipment: Ladders, Staircases
Furniture and Storage
Safety Equipment: Guardrails, Railings, Fencing
Mudsills and Ledgers
Serrated teeth
on the tip of the
Titen HD screw
anchor facilitate
cutting and
reduce
installation
torque.
CODES:
ETAG Option-1, ETA-12/0060
PERFORMANCE FEATURES:
Reduced Installation Time: No secondary setting or torquing is required.
Just drive it and youre done. Install more anchors per hour and reduce
labor costs.
Reduced Installation Torque: Testing shows that when compared with other
screw-type anchors, the Titen HD anchor requires 50% less torque to be
installed in concrete. The serrated teeth on the lead threads facilitate cutting,
enabling the user to install the anchor faster with less fatigue.
Cut Your Drill Bit Inventory: The Titen HD anchor requires NO SPECIAL
DRILL BITS. It is designed to install in standard metric sized holes so there
are no matched tolerance drill bits to be purchased separately.
Cut Down on Tools: Just an impact or socket wrench is all you need for
installation. No need for separate tools to drive and set the anchor.
Titen HD
screw anchor
Eliminate The Hassle of Removal: Since the Titen HD anchor is easy to

remove, it is ideal for temporary anchoring or applications where fixtures
may need to be moved. No torching or grinding is required after removal
eliminating possible corrosion and rust stains.
Avoid Lost Washers and Protruding Studs: The hex washer head eliminates
the need for a separate washer and provides a clean look after installation.
No Inspection Hassles: Because it is not an expansion anchor, there are no
installation torque requirements to verify with the Titen HD anchor. It also
has the Simpson Strong-Tie =/ sign along with the anchor length and
diameter stamped into the head, making post installation inspection a snap.
Proprietary Heat Treating Process: Creates

superior surface hardness for cutting into the
hardest of base materials, while at the same
time maintaining the anchors ductility.
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE:
Higher Load Capacity: Rather than one expansion area, the Titen HD
anchor has threads along the entire length of the anchor that undercut the
base material to efficiently transfer the load.
Vibration and Shock Resistance: The mechanical interlock of the threads
and the ratchet teeth on the underside of the head help prevent the anchor
from loosening in vibratory conditions. The Titen HD anchor has been
tested to 12.6 million vibratory cycles with no performance reductions.
Less Spacing and Edge Distance Required: The Titen HD anchor does not
exert expansion forces on the base material. This means greater placement
flexibility because anchors can be placed closer to each other or closer to
the edge of the base material while maintaining performance.
Proprietary Heat Treating Process: Creates superior surface hardness
for cutting into the hardest of base materials, while at the same time
maintaining the anchors ductility.
Full Body Diameter: The diameter of the anchor body is equal to the
nominal diameter of the anchor. That means that the body of a 16mm Titen
HD is a full 16mm. This gives the Titen HD anchor higher shear values than
other products which are often undersized. It also allows the Titen HD to be
installed with commonly used metric drill bits.
Easy Post-Installation Inspection: The head is stamped with the Simpson
Strong-Tie =/ sign and the anchor diameter and length in mm.
Can be bent to a right

angle (90 degrees) and
remain intact without
snapping or breakage.
Easy Post-Installation Inspection:

The head is stamped with the
Simpson Strong-Tie =/ sign
and the anchor size in mm.
49
TITEN HD Heavy Duty Screw Anchor for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete
INSTALLATION:
Hole Dimensions
Holes in metal fixtures to be mounted should match the diameter

range specified in the table.
Caution: Oversized holes in the base material will reduce or
eliminate the mechanical interlock of the threads with the base
material and will reduce the anchors load capacity. Use a Titen HD
screw anchor one time only. Installing the anchor multiple times
may result in excessive thread wear and reduce load capacity.
Drill a hole in the base material using a carbide drill bit the
same diameter as the nominal diameter of the anchor to be
installed. Drill the hole to the specified drill hole depth to
allow the thread tapping dust to settle and blow it clean using
compressed air. Overhead installations need not be blown
clean. Alternatively, drill the hole deep enough to accommodate
embedment depth and dust from drilling and tapping.
Insert the anchor through the fixture and into the hole.
Tighten the anchor into the base material until the hex washer
head contacts the fixture.
If the anchor will not install completely, remove the anchor and
assure that all dust has been evacuated or drill the hole deeper.
Begin re-installation of the anchor by hand to prevent crossthreading.
Do not use impact wrenches to install into hollow CMU.
Titen HD
Diameter
(mm)
Wrench
Size
(mm)
Recommended
Fixture
Hole Size Range
(mm)
THD08
13
12
THD10
15
14
THD12
18
16
THD16
24
22
THD20
30
26
The max. fixture holes are limited to the outside diameter

of the anchor based on ETAG 001, Annex C.
THD Cap (optional)

For extra corrosion protection and a
finished look, UV resistant. Snaps on
THD head. Available for M10 and M12
diameter THDs.
1. Drill hole
2. Clean hole
3. Set anchor with an impact wrench
4. Check connection
Titen HD Anchor Product Data - Zinc Plated

Size
(mm)
THD08 x 70
THD08 x 80
THD08 x 100
THD08 x 120
THD08 x 140
THD10 x 80
THD10 x 90
THD10 x 100
THD10 x 120
THD10 x 140
THD10 x 160
THD12 x 110
THD12 x 130
THD12 x 150
THD16 x 130
THD16 x 150
THD20 x 150
THD20 x 170
50
Model
No.
THD08070
THD08080
THD08100
THD08120
THD08140
THD10080
THD10090
THD10100
THD10120
THD10140
THD10160
THD12110
THD12130
THD12150
THD16130
THD16150
THD20150
THD20170
Quantity
Drill Bit Wrench
Dia.
Size
Per
Per
(mm) (mm) Inner Box Carton
50
200
50
200
8
13
50
200
50
100
50
100
50
200
50
200
50
200
10
15
50
100
50
100
50
100
20
80
12
18
20
80
20
80
10
40
16
24
10
40
5
20
20
30
5
10
Installation Sequence
Titen HD Anchor Product Data - Mechanically Galvanized

Size
(mm)
Model
No.
THD08 x 70
THD08 x 80
THD08 x 100
THD08 x 120
THD08 x 140
THD10 x 80
THD10 x 90
THD10 x 100
THD10 x 120
THD12 x 130
THD16 x 130
THD20 x 150
THD20 x 170
THD08070MG
THD08080MG
THD08100MG
THD08120MG
THD08140MG
THD10080MG
THD10090MG
THD10100MG
THD10120MG
THD12130MG
THD16130MG
THD20150MG
THD20170MG
Quantity
Drill Bit Wrench
Dia.
Size
Per
Per
(mm) (mm) Inner Box Carton
50
200
50
200
8
13
50
200
50
100
50
100
50
200
50
200
10
15
50
200
50
100
12
18
20
80
16
24
10
40
5
20
20
30
5
10
Titen HD Anchor Product Data
Carbon steel, zinc plated1) and mechanically galvanizing2)
TITEN HD
Approval: ETA-12/0060 - Option 1
ETA5)
Type
Model No.
Manual
Installation
Anchor
Size
[]
THD8 x 70/5
THD8 x 70/5 MG
THD8 x 80/15
THD8 x 80/15 MG
THD8 x 100/35
THD8 x 100/35 MG
THD8 x 120/55
THD8 x 120/55 MG
THD8 x 140/75
THD8 x 140/75 MG
THD10 x 80/5
THD10 x 80/5 MG
THD10 x 90/15
THD10 x 90/15 MG
THD10 x 100/25
THD10 x 100/25 MG
THD10 x 120/45
THD10 x 120/45 MG
THD10 x 140/65
THD10 x 160/85
THD12 x 110/15
THD12 x 110/15 MG
THD12 x 130/35
THD12 x 150/55
THD16 x 130/15
THD16 x 130/15 MG
THD16 x 150/35
THD20 x 150/15
THD20 x 150/15 MG
THD20 x 170/35
THD20 x 170/35 MG
THD08070
THD08070MG
THD08080
THD08080MG
THD08100
THD08100MG
THD08120
THD08120MG
THD08140
THD08140MG
THD10080
THD10080MG
THD10090
THD10090MG
THD10100
THD10100MG
THD10120
THD10120MG
THD10140
THD10160
THD12110
THD12110MG
THD12130
THD12150
THD16130
THD16130MG
THD16150
THD20150
THD20150MG
THD20170
THD20170MG
10
12
16
20
Max.
Fixture
Thickness
tfix
[mm]
5
5
15
15
35
35
55
55
75
75
5
5
15
15
25
25
45
45
65
85
15
15
35
55
15
15
35
15
15
35
35
Wrench
Size
[mm]
13
15
18
24
30
Total3)
Length
Weight
L
[mm]
70
70
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
80
80
90
90
100
100
120
120
140
160
110
110
130
150
130
130
150
150
150
170
170
[kg/100 pcs.]
3.73
3.73
4.14
4.14
4.94
4.94
5.68
5.68
6.47
6.47
6.67
6.67
7.28
7.28
7.87
7.87
9.04
9.04
10.32
11.59
12.70
12.70
14.47
16.24
28.15
28.15
31.77
44.39
44.39
50.31
50.31
Quantity
Box
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
Carton
[pcs]
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
80
80
80
80
40
40
40
20
20
10
10
1) Zinc plating meets ASTM B633, SC1.

2) Mechanical galvanizing meets ASTM B695, Class 65, Type 1 (Minimum thickness of 65 microns zinc coating. Not for use in highly corrosive or outdoor environments.
3) Length is measured from the underside of the head to the tip of the anchor.
4) Other sizes available in MG finish by special order, contact Simpson Strong-Tie for details.
5) MG finish ETA approval pending.
51
Carbon Steel, zinc plated and mechanically galvanized
Recommended loads for single anchors with no influencing edge distances or spacings. Loads are calculated using partial safety
factors from ETAG 001 and the characteristic anchor and installation data from this flyer. Design calculations shall follow the requirements of ETA -12/0060.
Material: Carbon steel, zinc plated and passivated
Anchor size
Nominal anchorage depth (hnom)
[mm]
Type
8
65
THD 8 x
10
75
THD 10 x
12
95
THD 12 x
16
115
THD 16 x
20
135
THD 20 x
Recommended tension loads 1)

C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
2.4
2.9
3.4
3.7
3.0
3.7
4.2
4.6
3.0
3.7
4.2
4.6
4.2
5.1
5.9
6.5
4.8
5.9
6.8
7.4
9.9
12.1
14.0
15.4
9.9
12.1
14.0
15.4
11.9
14.5
16.8
18.5
13.9
17.0
19.6
21.5
19.8
24.2
27.9
30.8
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
11.6
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
16.7
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
22.6
27.6
31.9
33.3
31.7
33.3
33.3
33.3
29.2
35.6
41.2
45.3
41.0
50.0
52.6
52.6
[Nm]
19.0
37.6
61.0
153.5
303.6
Spacings, edge distances and member thicknesses

Effective embedment depth
[mm]
hef
[mm]
Characteristic spacing 4)
scr,N
Minimum spacing
[mm]
smin
Characteristic edge distance 4)
[mm]
ccr,N
Minimum edge distance
[mm]
cmin
Minimum member thickness
[mm]
hmin
47.0
141.0
50
70.5
50
105
54.5
163.5
60
81.8
60
125
70.0
210.0
80
105.0
80
150
85.5
256.5
100
128.3
100
180
101.5
304.5
120
152.3
120
220
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Nominal anchorage depth
Clearence hole in the fixture
Width across flats
Installation torque (torque wrench)
Impact wrench 5)
8
75
65
12
13
n/a
200
10
85
75
14
15
75
12
105
95
16
18
n/a
16
130
115
22
24
280
20
160
135
26
30
350
Cracked
concrete
Nrec
Non-cracked
concrete 3)
Cracked
concrete
Vrec
Non-cracked
concrete 3)
Recommended bending moments 1

Mrec
d0
h1
hnom
df
sw
Tinst
TSD
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
515
Installed anchor
df
do
1) The recommended loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approval and an partial safety factor for actions of YF = 1.4. The
recommended loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar =
10 mm or smaller.
2) The recommended shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c < max [10 hef , 60 d]) concrete edge faliure
must be checked per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A.
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile stress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verification R = 3 N/mm can be assumed (L equates the
tensile stress within the concrete as a result of external loads, forces on anchors included).
4) If spacings or edge distances become smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N and/or c ccr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A must be
performed. For details see ETA-12/0060.
5) An impact screw driver is recommended for the installation.
52
Recommended shear load 12
TORQ-CUT Self-Undercutting Anchor for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete

The Torq-Cut self-undercutting anchor is a heavy-duty, high-capacity anchor designed
and tested for use in cracked and uncracked concrete under static and seismic loading
conditions. It is designed to meet the requirements that the 2006 IBC places on postinstalled anchors. The built in ring with hardened cutters expands with installation torque
forming undercut grooves in the concrete. This interlocking connection between the anchor
and the concrete provides superior load carrying capacity.
FEATURES:
Self-undercutting feature provides higher load carrying capacity than conventional
mechanical anchors
AC193 code tested to ensure outstanding performance in both cracked and uncracked
concrete
Excellent for resisting seismic and vibratory loads
Suitable for seismic applications categories A-F
Ductile steel rod provides consistent, reliable performance
Specially designed, low-friction wedge cone minimizes binding and speeds installation
Installs just like a conventional wedge anchor, no special tool, drill bit, or secondary
drilling is required
The head is stamped with the Simpson Strong-Tie "" sign and size
for easy post installation identification
Installs with standard drill bits
MATERIAL: ASTM A193 grade B7 or B7M rod with SAE J403 grade 1144 expansion clip
and cone
FINISH:
Zinc plated
CODES: ICC-ES ESR-2705, NQA1 approval pending
The load tables list values based upon results from the most recent testing and
may not reflect those in current code reports. Where code jurisdictions apply, consult
the current reports for applicable load values.
TEST CRITERIA: The Torq-Cut anchor has been tested in accordance with ICC-ES's
Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements (AC193) and ACI 355.2
for the following:
Static tension and shear loading in cracked and uncracked concrete
Seismic and wind loading in cracked and uncracked concrete
Performance in cracked concrete
Software Supported
Torq-Cut
Self-Undercutting Anchor
(Check latest software

version or
www.strongtie.com
for available support)
INSTALLATION:
Caution: Oversized holes in the base material will make it difficult to set the anchor
and will reduce the anchors load capacity.
Do not use an impact wrench to set or tighten the Torq-Cut anchor.
Pre-Set
Setting
Tube
Installation Instructions: Pre-Set Version

Drill a hole in the base material to the specified embedment depth using the appropriate
diameter carbide drill bit specified for each diameter.
Blow the hole clean using compressed air.
Assemble the anchor with nut and washer and finger tighten nut so all components
are snug (spacer sleeve, expansion sleeve and cone). The bottom of the threaded rod
should be flush with the bottom of the cone.
Place the anchor into the drilled hole and use a hammer and setting tube* to drive the
anchor until the washer and nut are tight against the surface of the base material.
Remove the nut and washer and install the fixture. Re-assemble the nut and
washer over the fixture.
Tighten to the required installation torque.
Through-Set
Setting
Tube
Installation Instructions: Through-Set Version

Drill a hole in the base material to the specified embedment depth using the appropriate
diameter carbide drill bit specified for each diameter.
Blow the hole clean using compressed air.
Assemble the anchor with nut and washer and finger tighten nut so all components
are snug (spacer sleeve, expansion sleeve and cone). The bottom of the threaded rod
should be flush with the bottom of the cone.
Place the anchor through the fixture and into the drilled hole. Use a hammer and setting
tube*
to drive the anchor until the washer and nut are tight against the fixture.
Tighten to the required installation torque.
APPLICATION:
Interior environment where low levels of moisture and corrosive chemicals are present
Contact Simpson Strong-Tie For Load and Design Information
*Setting tube is a metal spacer tube that prevents damage

to the threaded portion of the anchor when the anchor is
driven into the hole with a hammer. One setting tube is
included with every box of anchors.
Torq-Cut Anchor Installation Data

Nominal Anchor Dia mm (in)
Drill Bit Size mm (in)
1
Min. Fixture Hole Dia

Pre-Set mm (in)
Min. Fixture Hole Dia
1
Through-Set mm (in)
Wrench Size mm (in)

1
1
53
WEDGE ANCHOR
Throughbolt WA
For simple and economical applications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
The wedge anchor is installed through the fixture.
Torquing draws the cone end of the stud into the expansion clip. The expansion clip expands
and develops a frictional grip with the sidewalls of the hole.
FUNCTION:
Application of the installation torque draws the cone end of the stud into the expansion clip.
The expansion clip expands and develops a frictional grip with the sidewalls of the hole. This
gives the anchor its resistance to tension loads.
BENEFITS:
Economical anchor for medium-duty loads
Approved for use in non-cracked concrete
MATERIAL:
Carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
BASE MATERIAL:
Non-cracked concrete: C20/25 to C50/60
APPROVALS:
APPLICATIONS:
Steel construction
Facades
Railing
Cable trays
Brackets
Ladders
Throughbolt WA Installation Information and Additional Data:

Anchor Type
Anchor Type
Bolt
8-45
10-50
12-65
16-80
Maximum total length
[mm]
120
165
220
220
220
Drill hole diameter
do
[mm]
10
12
16
dcut,
max
[mm]
6.45
8.45
10.45
12.50
16.50
hef
[mm]
40
45
50
65
80
Depth of drilled hole to

deepest point
Diameter of clearance hole
in the fixture
h1
[mm]
55
65
70
90
110
df
[mm]
12
14
18
Maximum thickness of fixture tfix,max [mm]
65
100
140
120
95
Cutting diameter at the

upper tolerance limit
(max. diameter drill bit)
54
6-40
Installation torque
Tinst
[Nm]
15
30
50
100
Width across flats
SW
[mm]
10
13
17
19
24
Minimum thickness
of concrete member
hmin
[mm]
100
100
100
130
160
smin
[mm]
30
40
50
70
90
Minimum allowable
edge distance
cmin
[mm]
40
40
50
70
90
Throughbolt WA
with hex nut, sleeve and washer
1. Drill hole
2. Clean hole (blowing)
3. Insert anchor
through fixture
4. Apply recommended
fastening torque with a
calibrated torque-wrench
ETA-11/0080 - Option 7: M8-M16, carbon steel, zinc plated
WEDGE ANCHOR
Throughbolt WA
Carbon steel, zinc plated

Includes hex nut and washer
Material: Carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
Approval: ETA - 11/0080
Throughbolt
g
WA
Type
WA 6/5
WA 6/20
WA 6/30
WA 8/5
WA 8/20
WA 8/30
WA 8/50
WA 8/100
WA 10/10
WA 10/20
WA 10/30
WA 10/50
WA 10/70
WA 10/100
WA 10/140
WA 12/05
WA 12/10
WA 12/30
WA 12/50
WA 12/100
WA 12/120
WA 12/140
WA 12/160
WA 16/05
WA 16/30
WA 16/50
WA 16/80
WA 16/100
WA 16/140
WA 20/05
WA 20/30
WA 20/50
WA 20/120
(M6 x 60)
(M6 x 75)
(M6 x 85)
(M8 x 68)
(M8 x 83)
(M8 x 93)
(M8 x 113)
(M8 x 163)
(M10 x 83)
(M10 x 93)
(M10 x 103)
(M10 x 123)
(M10 x 143)
(M10 x 173)
(M10 x 213)
(M12 x 85)
(M12 x 109)
(M12 x 129)
(M12 x 149)
(M12 x 199)
(M12 x 219)
(M12 x 239)
(M12 x 259)
(M16 x 110)
(M16 x 151)
(M16 x 171)
(M16 x 201)
(M16 x 221)
(M16 x 261)
(M20 x 120)
(M20 x 173)
(M20 x 193)
(M20 x 263)
ETA
SKU Name Approved
WA06060
WA06075
WA06085
WA08068
WA08083
WA08093
WA08113
WA08163
WA10083
WA10093
WA10103
WA10123
WA10143
WA10173
WA10213
WA12085
WA12109
WA12129
WA12149
WA12199
WA12219
WA12239
WA12259
WA16110
WA16151
WA16171
WA16201
WA16221
WA16261
WA20120
WA20173
WA20193
WA20263
Thread
Size
[mm]
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M20
M20
M20
M20
Depth of
Drilled Hole
do x h1
[mm]
6 x 55
8 x 65
10 x 70
12 x 90
16 x 110
20 x 130
Max. Fixture
Thickness
tfix
[mm]
5
20
30
5
20
30
50
100
10
20
30
50
70
100
140
5
10
30
50
100
120
140
160
10
30
50
80
100
140
5
30
50
120
Eff.
Fixture
Embedment Length
Hole
Depth
df
hef
L
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
60
7
40
75
85
68
83
9
45
93
113
163
83
93
103
12
50
123
143
173
213
85
109
129
149
14
65
199
219
239
259
110
151
171
18
80
201
221
261
120
173
22
100
193
263
Weight
Quantity
[kg/
CTN BOX
1000pcs] [pcs] [pcs]
14
500 100
16.4
500 100
18.1
500 100
28.4
250
50
33.0
250
50
36.1
200
50
42.2
200
50
57.5
200
50
56.1
200
50
61
200
50
65.8
200
50
75.5
200
50
85.2
100
50
99.6
100
50
120.6
100
50
84.4
125
25
101.4
100
25
115.4
100
25
129.6
100
25
164.7
50
25
178.8
50
25
202.0
50
25
225.6
40
20
190
80
20
243.4
40
20
269.6
40
20
308.9
20
10
362.2
20
10
420.2
20
10
332.8
40
10
441.1
40
10
490.0
40
10
652.3
20
10
55
WEDGE ANCHOR
Throughbolt WA
Carbon Steel, zinc plated

Recommended loads for single anchors with no influencing edge distance or spacings. Loads are calculated using partial safety factors from
ETAG 001 and the characteristic anchor and installation data.
Material: Carbon steel, zinc plated
Thread size
Effective embedment depth (hef)
Model
[mm]
M6
40
WA 6/
M8
45
WA 8/
M10
50
WA 10/
M12
65
WA 12/
M16
80
WA 16/
M20 5)
100
WA 20/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
4.3
4.6
5.0
5.3
5.7
7.0
8.1
8.9
7.6
9.3
10.7
11.8
12.6
15.4
17.8
19.5
17.2
21.0
24.3
26.7
19.9
19.9
19.9
19.9
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
8.5
9.7
9.7
9.7
14.3
14.3
14.3
14.3
26.9
26.9
26.9
26.9
26.7
26.7
26.7
26.7
[Nm]
6.5
16.1
32.1
56.1
133.0
228.1

[mm]
hef
Characteristic spacing 4)
[mm]
scr,N
[mm]
Minimum spacing
smin
Characteristic edge distance 4)
[mm]
ccr,N
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
hmin
40
120
30
60
40
100
45
135
40
67.5
40
100
50
150
50
75
50
100
65
195
70
97.5
70
130
80
240
90
120
90
160
100
300
120
150
120
200
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Clearence hole in the fixture
Width across flats
Installation torque
6
55
7
10
8
8
65
9
13
15
10
70
12
17
30
12
90
14
19
50
16
110
18
24
100
20
130
22
30
200
Recommended tension loads 1)

Nrec
Non-cracked
concrete 3)
Vrec
Non-cracked
concrete 3)
Recommended bending moments 1

Mrec
d0
h1
df
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
Installed anchor
1) The recommended loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the pending ETA approval and an partial safety factor for actions of YF= 1.4. The
permissible loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar = 10
mm or smaller.
2) The recommended shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c 10hef or 60d) concrete edge failure
must be checked per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A.
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile tress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verification R = 3 N/mm2 can be assumed (L
equates the tensile stress within the concrete as a result of external loads, forces on anchors included).
4) If spacings or edge distances become smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N and/or c ccr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A must be
performed. For details, see ETA-11/0080
5) Not included in the approval ETA-11/0080
56
Recommended shear load 12
BOA-X AND BOAX-II
Expansion Anchor Systems
THROUGHBOLT BOA-X AND BOAX-II

Economical anchor for medium-duty loads.
R 120
FEATURES:
Approved for use in cracked and non-cracked concrete
Less drilling effort: Anchor diameter = Drill bit diameter
Made in Europe
APPLICATIONS:
Steel construction
Railing
Brackets
Facades
Cable trays
Ladders
MATERIAL:
Carbon steel, and A4 stainless steel
FINISH:
Zinc plated carbon steel and A4 stainless steel
BASE MATERIAL:
Cracked and non-cracked concrete: C20/25 to C50/60 (B25 to B55)

Also suitable for high density natural stones (D 25 N/mm2)
APPROVALS:
ETA-08/0276 - Option 1: M8-M16, carbon steel, zinc plated
ETA-08/0276 - Option 1: M8-M16, A4 stainless steel
LOAD RANGE:
Tension:
Shear:
Nperm= 1.8 - 21.4 [kN]

Vperm= 1.8 - 22.4 [kN]
PRODUCT RANGE:
BoAX-II:
BoAX-II A4:
BoA-X:
BoA-X A4:
M8 - M16, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated

M8 - M16, A4 stainless steel
M6 + M20, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
M6 + M20, A4 stainless steel
INSTALLATION:
The throughbolt anchor is installed through the fixture
Torquing draws the cone end of the stud into the expansion clip. The expansion clip
expands and develops a frictional grip with the sidewalls of the hole.
90
Drill hole
Clean hole (blowing) Insert anchor

through fixture
Apply recommended
fastening torque with
a calibrated torquewrench
BoA-X/ BoAX-II with hex nut, washer
57
BOA-X AND BOAX-II

THROUGHBOLT BOA-X AND BOAX-II
Type
Order Code
Eff.
Fixture
Embedment
Hole
Depth
x
Depth of
Drilled Hole
Max.
Fixture
Thickness
do x h1
tfix
df
Total
Length
Thread
Length
hef
Weight
Box
Quantity
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
BoA-X 6/15*
BoA-X 6/50*
BOAX0606035015
M6
6 x 50
15
35
65
28
1.54
100
BOAX0606035050
M6
6 x 50
50
35
100
28
2.27
100
BoAX-II 8/10
BOAXII08045010
M8
8 x 60
10
45
72
32
2.91
50
BoAX-II 8/30
BOAXII08045030
M8
8 x 60
30
45
92
52
3.53
50
BoAX-II 8/50
BOAXII08045050
M8
8 x 60
50
45
112
72
4.14
40
BoAX-II 8/85
BOAXII08045085
M8
8 x 60
85
45
147
107
5.21
40
BoAX-II 10/10
BOAXII10060010
M10
10 x 75
10
12
60
92
47
5.92
40
BoAX-II 10/20
BOAXII10060020
M10
10 x 75
20
12
60
102
57
6.41
25
BoAX-II 10/30
BOAXII10060030
M10
10 x 75
30
12
60
112
67
6.91
25
BoAX-II 10/50
BOAXII10060050
M10
10 x 75
50
12
60
132
87
7.89
25
BoAX-II 10/80
BOAXII10060080
M10
10 x 75
80
12
60
162
115
9.37
25
BoAX-II 12/5
BOAXII12070005
M12
12 x 90
14
70
103
53
9.53
20
BoAX-II 12/20
BOAXII12070020
M12
12 x 90
20
14
70
118
68
10.60
20
BoAX-II 12/30
BOAXII12070030
M12
12 x 90
30
14
70
128
78
11.31
20
BoAX-II 12/50
BOAXII12070050
M12
12 x 90
50
14
70
148
98
12.73
20
BoAX-II 12/65
BOAXII12070065
M12
12 x 90
65
14
70
163
113
13.80
20
BoAX-II 12/80
BOAXII12070080
M12
12 x 90
80
14
70
178
115
14.87
20
BoAX-II 16/5
BOAXII16085005
M16
16 x 110
18
85
123
65
20.16
10
BoAX-II 16/20
BOAXII16085020
M16
16 x 110
20
18
85
138
80
22.17
10
BoAX-II 16/50
BOAXII16085050
M16
16 x 110
50
18
85
168
110
26.19
10
BoAX-II 16/60
BOAXII16085060
M16
16 x 110
60
18
85
178
115
27.53
10
BoA-X 16/95*
BOAX1616085095
M16
16 x 110
95
18
80
213
55
35.01
10
BoA-X 20/20*
BOAX2020110020
M20
20 x 130
20
22
110
170
55
44.83
BoA-X 20/70*
BOAX2020110070
M20
20 x 130
70
22
110
220
55
57.02
BoA-X 20/130*
BOAX2020110130
M20
20 x 130
130
22
110
280
55
71.78
*Not included in approval.
58
Thread
Size
With hex nut and washer

Approval: ETA-08/0276 (M8 - M16) - Option 1
BOA-X AND BOAX-II
Technical Data

Permissible loads for single anchors with no influencing edge distances or spacings. Loads are calculated using partial safety factors from ETAG 001
and the characteristic anchor and installation data from this catalogue.
Design calculations shall follow the requirements of ETA-08/0276.
MADE IN EUROPE
[mm]
M65)
35
BoA-X 6/
M8
45
BoAX-II 8/
M10
60
BoAX-II 10/
M12
70
BoAX-II 12/
M166)
85
BoAX-II 16/
M205)
110
BoA-X 20/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
3.6
3.9
4.3
4.6
3.6
4.0
4.3
4.6
6.3
6.9
7.6
8.1
4.8
5.3
5.8
6.1
7.9
8.7
9.5
10.1
9.5
10.5
11.4
12.2
16.7
18.4
20.0
21.4
13.9
13.9
13.9
13.9
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
21.0
13.9
13.9
13.9
13.9
[Nm]
4.1
10.0
22.9
34.3
88.6
173.0
35
120
120
90
90
45
135
50
68
50
60
180
55
90
50
70
210
60
105
55
85
255
70
128
85
110
400
400
300
300
60
100
120
140
170
180
6
50
7
10
7
8
60
9
13
20
10
75
12
17
35
12
90
14
19
50
16
110
18
24
120
20
130
22
30
240
Thread size
Type BoA-...
Permissible tension loads1)
Cracked
Concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible shear loads1) 2)
Cracked
Concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible bending moments1)

Mzul4)

[mm]
hef
Characteristic spacing4)
[mm]
scr,N
Minimum spacing
[mm]
smin
Characteristic edge distance4) ccr,N
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
Minimum member
[mm]
hmin
thickness
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Clearance hole in the fixture
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
df
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
Installed anchor
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approval and a partial safety factor for actions of F = 1.4.
The permissible loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10
mm or smaller.
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c < 10 hef or < 60 d) concrete edge failure must be
checked per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A.
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile stress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verification R = 3 N/mm2 can be assumed (L equals the tensile
4) If spacings or edge distances become smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N and/or c ccr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A must be performed.
For details, see ETA-08/0276.
5) Not included in the approval ETA-08/0276.
6) Type BoA-X 16/95 is not included in ETA-08/0276. Permissible loads in C20/25 to C50/60 cracked concrete: Nperm = 6.4 [kN] ; Vperm = 6,4 [kN].
Permissible loads in C20/25 to C50/60 non-cracked concrete: Nperm = 10.0 [kN] ; Vperm = 10.0 [kN].
Complete your designs more easily by downloading our LIEBIG anchor software from our home-page: www.simpson-liebig.com
59
BOA-X AND BOAX-II
A4 stainless steel
THROUGHBOLT BOA-X-A4 AND BOAX-II A4
Type
Order Code
Eff.
Fixture
Embedment
Hole
Depth
Total
Length
Thread
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
Weight
Box
Quantity
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
BoA-X 6/15 A4*

BoAX-II 8/10 A4
BOAX0606035015A4
M6
6 x 50
15
35
65
28
1.5
100
BOAXII08045010A4
M8
8 x 60
10
45
72
32
2.9
50
BoAX-II 8/30 A4
BOAXII08045030A4
M8
8 x 60
30
45
92
52
3.5
50
BoAX-II 8/50 A4
BOAXII08045050A4
M8
8 x 60
50
45
112
72
4.1
40
BoAX-II 10/10 A4
BOAXII10060010A4
M10
10 x 75
10
12
60
92
47
5.9
40
BoAX-II 10/20 A4
BOAXII10060020A4
M10
10 x 75
20
12
60
102
57
6.4
25
BoAX-II 10/30 A4
BOAXII10060030A4
M10
10 x 75
30
12
60
112
67
6.9
25
BoAX-II10/50 A4
BOAXII10060050A4
M10
10 x 75
50
12
60
132
87
7.9
25
BoAX-II 12/5 A4
BOAXII12070005A4
M12
12 x 90
14
70
103
53
9.5
20
BoAX-II 12/20 A4
BOAXII12070020A4
M12
12 x 90
20
14
70
118
68
10.6
20
BoAX-II 12/30 A4
BOAXII12070030A4
M12
12 x 90
30
14
70
128
78
11.3
20
BoAX-II 12/50 A4
BOAXII12070050A4
M12
12 x 90
50
14
70
148
98
12.7
20
BoAX-II 12/65 A4
BOAXII12070065A4
M12
12 x 90
65
14
70
163
113
13.8
20
BoAX-II 16/5 A4
BOAXII16085005A4
M16
16 x 110
18
85
123
65
20.2
10
BoAX-II 16/20 A4
BOAXII16085020A4
M16
16 x 110
20
18
85
138
80
22.2
10
BoAX-II 16/50 A4
BOAXII16085050A4
M16
16 x 110
50
18
85
168
110
26.2
10
BoA-X 20/20 A4*
BOAX2020110020A4
M20
20 x 130
20
22
110
170
55
44.8
BoA-X 20/70 A4*
BOAX2020110070A4
M20
20 x 130
70
22
110
220
55
57.0
60
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
Thread
Size Drilled Hole Thickness
With hex nut and washer

Material: A4 stainless steel
Approval: ETA-08/0276 (M8 - M16) - Option 1
BOA-X AND BOAX-II
Technical Data
A4 stainless steel
Material: A4 stainless steel
[mm]
M65)
35
BoA-X 6/
M8
45
BoAX-II 8/
M10
60
BoAX-II 10/
M12
70
BoAX-II 12/
M16
85
BoAX-II 16/
M205)
110
BoA-X 20/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
3.6
3.9
4.3
4.6
3.6
4.0
4.3
4.6
6.3
6.9
7.6
8.1
4.8
5.3
5.8
6.1
7.9
8.7
9.5
10.1
9.5
10.5
11.4
12.2
16.7
18.4
20.0
21.4
13.9
13.9
13.9
13.9
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
11.9
11.9
11.9
11.9
11.9
11.9
11.9
11.9
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.4
13.9
13.9
13.9
13.9
[Nm]
4.4
10.5
21.4
37.6
95.2
185.4
35
120
120
90
90
45
135
50
68
50
60
180
55
90
50
70
210
60
105
55
85
255
70
128
85
110
400
400
300
300
60
100
120
140
170
180
6
50
7
10
7
8
60
9
13
20
10
75
12
17
35
12
90
14
19
50
16
110
18
24
120
20
130
22
30
240
Thread size
Type BoA-...
Cracked
Concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
Concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible bending moments1)

Mzul4)

[mm]
hef
scr,N
[mm]
Minimum spacing
[mm]
smin
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
Minimum member
[mm]
hmin
thickness
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
df
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
Installed anchor
The permissible loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10
mm or smaller.
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c < 10 hef or < 60 d) concrete edge failure must be
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile stress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verification R = 3 N/mm2 can be assumed (L equals the tensile
5) Not included in the approval ETA-08/0276.
61
DROP-IN ANCHOR
Internally Threaded Expansion Shell Anchor
Drop-in anchors are internally threaded, deformation controlled expansion

anchors with a preassembled expander plug, suitable for flush mount
applications in solid base materials. The anchor is set by driving the expansion
plug towards the bottom of the anchor using the setting tool.
The Lipped Drop-In (DIAL) features a lip at the top of the anchor body that
keeps the top of the anchor flush with the concrete. This eliminates the
need for precisely drilled hole depths and allows for easier flush installation,
consistent embedment and uniform rod lengths.
MATERIAL:
Carbon and A4 Stainless steel
(DIAL1030 available in zinc plated carbon steel only)
FINISH:
Zinc plated carbon steel and A4 Stainless steel
INSTALLATION:
Drill a hole in the base material using the proper diameter carbide drill bit
as specified in the table. Drill the hole to the specified embedment depth
plus 3 to 5mm for flush mounting. Blow the hole clean using compressed
air. Overhead holes do not need to be blown clean.
CAUTION- oversize holes will make it difficult to set the anchor and will
reduce the anchors load capacity.
Insert anchor into hole. Tap with hammer until flush against the surface.
Using the proper sized Drop-In setting tool (DIAST); drive the expander
plug towards the bottom of the anchor until shoulder of setting tool makes
contact with the top of the anchor.
TEST CRITERIA:
The Drop-In anchor has been tested in accordance with ASTM E488 Standard
Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.
Material Specifications:
Component Material
Anchor
Component
Anchor
Body
Zinc Plated
Carbon Steel
AISI 1008
Grade 1008
Expander
Plug
AISI 1008
Grade 1008
Type A4
Thread
Course
Course
Stainless Steel
Type A4
Drop-In Anchor Setting Tool Product Data

Model No.
Use With
DIAST06
DIAST08
DIAST10
DIAST12
DIAST16
DIAST20
DIA06
DIA08
DIA10
DIA12
DIA16
DIA20
Drop-In
Lipped Drop-In
Box Qty.
10
10
10
10
5
5
1. Drill hole
2. Insert setting tool
3. Set until flush with

concrete surface
4. Insert fixture rod,

tighten nut
1. Setting tools sold separately except for DIAL1030.

2. Setting tools for use with carbon steel and stainless steel drop-in anchors.
Standard Setting Tool
62
DROP-IN ANCHOR
Drop-In Anchor Product Data

Material/Finish - Carbon steel, Electro Zinc Plated
Model No.
Size
Drill Bit
Diameter
(mm)
Anchor
Length
(mm)
Thread
Length
(mm)
Box
Ctn.
DIA06
M6
25
10
100
500
DIA08
M8
10
30
13
100
500
DIA10
M10
12
40
16
50
250
DIAL1030
M10
12
30
11
100
500
DIA12
M12
16
50
21
50
200
DIA16
M16
20
65
30
25
100
DIA20
M20
25
80
30
20
80
Quantity
1. A dedicated setting tool is included with each box of the DIAL1030

2. Carbon steel, electro zinc plated anchors are limited to dry interior use
Lipped Drop-In
Drop-In Anchor Product Data

Material/Finish - A4 Stainless Steel
Model No.
Drill Bit
Diameter
(mm)
Size
Anchor
Length
(mm
Thread
Length
(mm)
Quantity
Box
Ctn.
DIA06A4
M6
25
10
100
500
DIA08A4
M8
10
30
13
100
500
DIA10A4
M10
12
40
16
50
250
DIA12A4
M12
16
50
21
50
200
DIA16A4
M16
20
65
30
25
100
DIA20A4
M20
25
80
30
20
80
Drop-In
Anchor
Tension and Shear Loads for Metric Drop-In (Carbon and Stainless Steel) and
Metric Lipped Drop-In (Carbon Steel) Anchors Installed in Normal-Weight Concrete
Tension Load
Shear Load
f'c 20 MPa (2900 psi)

Ultimate
Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
f'c 20 MPa (2900 psi)

Ultimate
Allowable
(kN)
(kN)
Size
(mm)
Drill
Bit
Diameter
(mm)
Embed.
(6)
Depth
(mm)
Critical
Edge
Dist.
(mm)
Critical
Spacing
(mm)
25
85
100
7.1
1.8
6.9
1.7
10
30
110
120
10.2
2.6
10.1
2.5
12
30
140
120
11.0
2.7
10.1
2.5
10
12
40
140
160
14.0
3.5
10.1
2.5
12
16
50
170
200
21.1
5.3
32.5
8.1
16
20
65
225
260
29.6
7.4
47.6
11.9
20
25
80
280
320
40.4
10.1
77.5
19.4
8
10
(5)
1. The allowable loads listed are based on a safety factor of 4.0.

2. Allowable loads may not be increased for short-term loading due to wind or seismic forces.
3. Refer to allowable load adjustment factors for edge distance and spacing.
4. The minimum concrete thickness is 1.5 x times the embedment depth.
5. Loads are for carbon steel DIAL 1030 Lipped Drop-In only.
6. Drill the hole to the specified embedment depth plus 3 to 5mm for flush mounting.
63
DROP-IN ANCHOR
Load-Adjustment Factors for Drop-In (Carbon and Stainless Steel) and Lipped Drop-In (Carbon Steel) Anchors
in Normal-Weight Concrete: Edge Distance and Spacing, Tension and Shear Loads
Size
Ccr
Cmin
fcmin
6
85
40
0.65
0.65
0.77
0.81
0.88
0.92
1.00
8
110
55
0.65
0.65
0.68
0.75
0.78
0.84
0.90
0.94
1.00
10
140
70
0.65
0.65
0.68
0.73
0.78
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
12
170
85
0.65
0.65
0.69
0.71
0.75
0.79
0.84
0.88
0.90
0.96
1.00
16
225
110
0.65
0.65
0.68
0.71
0.74
0.76
0.80
0.83
0.86
0.89
0.92
1.00
20
280
140
0.65
Size
E
Sact
S
(mm) cr
Smin
fsmin
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
0.65
0.66
0.70
0.73
0.75
0.78
0.80
0.86
0.93
1.00
See Notes Below
64
Size
Ccr
Cmin
fcmin
6
85
40
0.45
0.45
0.63
0.69
0.82
0.88
1.00
0.45
0.50
0.60
0.65
0.75
0.85
0.90
1.00
10
140
70
0.45
0.45
0.49
0.57
0.65
0.69
0.76
0.84
0.92
1.00
12
170
85
0.45
0.45
0.51
0.55
0.61
0.68
0.74
0.81
0.84
0.94
1.00
16
225
110
0.45
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.59
0.62
0.69
0.74
0.78
0.83
0.88
1.00
(9)
8
30
120
60
0.50
10
30
120
60
0.50
0.50
0.58
0.67
0.75
0.83
0.92
1.00
0.50
0.58
0.67
0.75
0.83
0.92
1.00
10
40
160
80
0.50
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.69
0.75
0.81
0.88
0.94
1.00
12
50
200
100
0.50
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.90
1.00
16
65
260
130
0.50
0.50
0.54
0.58
0.62
0.69
0.77
0.85
0.92
1.00
20
80
320
160
0.50
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.69
0.75
0.81
0.88
0.94
1.00
20
280
140
0.45
0.45
0.47
0.53
0.57
0.61
0.65
0.69
0.78
0.88
1.00
1. Cact = actual edge distance at which anchor is installed (mm).

2. Ccr = critical edge distance for 100% load (mm).
3. Cmin = minimum edge distance for reduced load (mm).
4. fc = adjustment factor for allowable load at actual edge distance.
5. fccr = adjustment factor for allowable load at critical edge distance.
fccr is always = 1.00.
6. fcmin = adjustment factor for allowable load at minimum edge distance.
7. fc = fcmin + [(1 - fcmin) (Cact - Cmin) / (Ccr - Cmin)].
8
110
55
0.45
6
25
100
50
0.50
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
1. E = Embedment depth (mm).

2. Sact = actual spacing distance at which anchors are installed (mm).
3. Scr = critical spacing distance for 100% load (mm).
4. Smin = minimum spacing distance for reduced load (mm).
5. fs = adjustment factor for allowable load at actual spacing distance.
6. fscr = adjustment factor for allowable load at critical spacing distance.
fscr is always = 1.00.
7. f smin = adjustment factor for allowable load at minimum spacing
distance.
8. fs = fsmin + [(1 - fsmin) (Sact - Smin) / (Scr - Smin)].
9. M10 DIAL1030 Lipped drop-in anchor.
Edge Distance Shear (fc)

Edge
Dist.
Cact
(mm)
40
55
60
70
75
85
95
100
110
120
130
140
145
160
170
180
190
200
225
250
280
* Spacing Tension and Shear (fs)
Edge Distance Tension (fc)

Edge
Dist.
Cact
(mm)
40
55
60
70
75
85
95
100
110
120
130
140
145
160
170
180
190
200
225
250
280
4. The load adjustment factor (fc or fs) is the intersection of the row
and column.
5. Multiply the allowable load by the applicable load adjustment factor.
6. Reduction factors for multiple edges or spacing are multiplied together.
How to use these charts:

1. The following tables are for reduced edge distance and spacing.
2. Locate the anchor size to be used for either a tension and/or
shear load application.
3. Locate the edge distance (Cact) or spacing (Sact) at which
the anchor is to be installed.
SLEEVE-ALL
Sleeve Anchors
Sleeve-All sleeve anchors are pre-assembled expanding sleeve anchors

for use in all types of solid base materials. These anchors are available in
acorn, hex or rod coupler styles for a wide range of
applications.
SLEEVE-ALL ANCHORS
MATERIAL: Carbon and stainless steel

FINISH:
Carbon Steel: Zinc plated
CODES: Factory Mutual 3017082, 3026805 and 3029959,

" " dia.; Underwriters Laboratories File Ex3605, " " dia.
Meets requirements of Federal Specifications A-A-1922A.
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS:
Sleeve anchors shall be zinc plated studs having a minimum 50,000 psi
(344MPa) tensile strength with an expansion sleeve meeting AISI 1008
cold rolled steel or type 304(A2) stainless steel stud with a type 304(A2)
stainless-steel expansion sleeve, as called for on the drawings. Sleeve
anchors shall meet Federal Specifications A-A-1922A. Anchors shall be
Sleeve-All expanding sleeve anchors from Simpson Strong-Tie, U.S.A.
Anchors shall be installed following the Simpson Strong-Tie instructions for
Sleeve-All expanding sleeve anchors.
Acorn
Anchor Body
Sleeve
Nut
Washer
Rod Coupler
for hanging
threaded rod
Sleeve-All Anchor Installation Sequence
Material Specifications
Anchor
Component
Hex
Zinc Plated Carbon Steel

Material meets minimum 344MPa (50,000psi)
tensile
SAE J403, Grade 1008 Cold Rolled Steel
Commercial Grade, meets requirements
of ASTM A563 Grade A
SAE J403, Grade 1008/1010
Cold Rolled Steel
304(A2)
Stainless Steel
Type 304
Type 304
Type 304
Type 304
Contact Simpson Strong-Tie For Styles, Size and Technical Information
65
BLUE BANGER HANGER
Cast-In-Place, Internally-Threaded Inserts
Blue Banger Hanger internally-threaded inserts are cast into the

underside of the concrete deck after being fastened to the top of wood
forms or metal deck. Once the concrete has cured, the anchor provides
an attachment point for threaded rod used to hang electrical, mechanical
and plumbing utilities. The Blue Banger Hanger insert is the only pre-pour
insert to offer the patented multi-thread design which allows one size
insert to handle multiple diameters of threaded rod.
FEATURES:
Quick and easy installation saves time and
money- no assembly required.
Patented multi-thread design allows each
hanger to accept multiple diameters of threaded
rod. Three sizes of hangers can handle all
applications, reducing contractor and
distributor inventories.
Multi-thread design allows threaded rod
size to be changed after the anchor is in
the concrete.
Machined steel insert with large flanged
head provides high tension and shear loads
Patented multifor overhead attachments.
thread design
Positive attachment to form keeps the
allows one
hanger vertical and in the correct position.
product to handle
up to three rod
Internal threads eliminate the cost of
diameters.
rod couplers.
The head is stamped with the Simpson Strong-Tie
"" sign for easy identification before the concrete pour.
Blue Banger Hanger

Metal Deck Insert (BBMD)
U.S. Patent 6,240,697B1
MATERIAL: Carbon steel

Yellow-zinc dichromate
Blue Banger Hanger

Roof Deck Insert (BBRD)
CODES: Factory Mutual 3024378 (except roof deck insert);

Underwriters Laboratories File EX3605 (except roof deck insert);
See pipe size limit tables.
U.S. Patent 6,240,697B1
Blue Banger Hanger Product Data

Hanger
Type
For Rod
Diameter
(in.)
Deck Hole
Diameter
(in.)
Model
No.
Carton
Qty.
Metal Deck
Insert
, ,
, ,
,
-
1-1
1-1
BBMD2550
BBMD3762
BBMD6275
100
50
50
Roof Deck
Insert
, ,
BBRD2550
50
Wood Form
Insert
, ,
, ,
,
N/A
BBWF2550
BBWF3762
BBWF6275
200
150
150
3/4"
5/8"
1/2"
3/8" 1/4"
Blue Banger Hanger

Wood Form Insert (BBWF)
U.S. Patent 6,240,697B1
Multiple rod diameters are

easily accommodated with
the Blue Banger Hanger.
Metric Diameters Available Soon, Contact Simpson Strong-Tie For

Technical Data and Further Information
66
FINISH:
TITEN Concrete and Masonry Screws

Titen screws are " and " diameter masonry screws for attaching
all types of components to concrete and masonry. Available in hex and
phillips head designs in three colors. Use with appropriately sized Titen
drill bits included with each box.
Warning: Industry studies show that hardened fasteners can
experience performance problems in wet or corrosive environments.
Accordingly, use these products in dry, interior and non-corrosive
environments only.
MATERIAL: Heat-treated carbon steel
FINISH:
Zinc plated with a baked on ceramic coating
Titen
Phillips
flat head
screw
(PF)
Titen
Hex head
screw
(H)
Titen Tension and Shear Load Values in Normal-Weight Concrete

Tension Load
Shear Load
Titen Drill Bit Embed. Critical Critical
Dia.
Dia.
Depth Spacing Edge
f'c 2000 psi
f'c 4000 psi
f'c 2000 psi
in.
in.
in.
in.
Dist. (13.8 MPa) Concrete (27.6 MPa) Concrete (13.8 MPa) Concrete
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
in.
Ultimate Allowable Ultimate Allowable Ultimate Allowable
(mm) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN)
1
500
125
640
160
1,020
255
2
1

(25.4) (57.2) (28.6)
(2.2)
(0.6)
(2.8)
(0.7)
(4.5)
(1.1)
(4.8)
1,220
305
1,850
460
1,670
415
1
2
1

(5.4)
(1.4)
(8.2)
(2.0)
(7.4)
(1.8)
(38.1) (57.2) (28.6)
(4.8)
1
3
580
145
726
180
900
225
1
(25.4) (76.2) (38.1) (2.6)

(0.6)
(3.2)
(0.8)
(4.0)
(1.0)
(6.4)
3
1,460
365
2,006
500
1,600
400
1
1
(38.1) (76.2) (38.1) (6.5)

(1.6)
(8.9)
(2.2)
(7.1)
(1.8)
(6.4)
1. Maximum anchor embedment is 1" (38.1 mm).
2. Concrete must be minimum 1.5 x embedment.
Titen Tension and Shear Load Values in

Face Shell of Hollow and Grout-Filled CMU
Values for 6" or 8" Lightweight,

Dia.
Dia.
Depth Spacing Edge Medium-Weight or Normal-Weight CMU
in.
in.
in.
in.
Dist.
Tension Load
Shear Load
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
in.
Avg. Ult. Allow. Avg. Ult. Allow.
(mm) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN)
1
542
110
1,016
205
2
1

(25.4) (57.2) (28.6)
(2.4)
(0.5)
(4.5)
(0.9)
(4.8)
1
3
740
150
1,242
250
1
(25.4) (76.2) (38.1) (3.3)

(0.7)
(5.5)
(1.1)
(6.4)
1. The tabulated allowable loads are based on a safety factor of 5.0 for installations under the IBC and IRC.
For installations under the UBC use a safety factor of 4.0 (multiply the tabulated allowable loads by 1.25).
2. See notes 1 and 2 above.
67
TITEN Stainless-Steel Concrete and Masonry Screws

The new stainless-steel Titen screws are ideal for attaching all types of components to
concrete and masonry in environments where corrosion is a concern. These screws combine
the versatility of our standard Titen screws with the benefits of enhanced corrosion protection.
The combination of 410 (C1) stainless steel and a protective coating provides excellent corrosion resistance. Available in hex and phillips head, the Titen screws are designed for use with
appropriately-sized drill bits that are included with each box.
FEATURES:
410 grade stainless steel with C4 top coat for added corrosion protection
Suitable for concrete, brick and hollow-block applications
Suitable for some preservative-treated wood applications
Available in lengths from 1" to 4"
5% observed red rust after 1500 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test*.
* Salt-spray test performance is based on tests on uninstalled fasteners,
and may not reflect actual performance when installed. This information is
provided for comparative purposes only.
MATERIAL: Heat-treated 410 (C1) stainless steel
C4 (zinc plated with a protective overcoat)
Titen Stainless-Steel
Hex-Head Screw
(HSS)
410 Stainless-Steel Titen Tension and Shear Load Values

in Normal-Weight Concrete
Titen Stainless-Steel
Phillips-Head Screw
(PFSS)
Tension Load
Shear Load
Drill Embed. Critical Critical
f'c
2000
psi
f'c
4000
psi
f'c
2000 psi
Bit Depth Spacing Edge
(13.8 MPa)
(27.6 MPa)
(13.8 MPa)
Dia.
in.
in.
Dist.
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
in. (mm) (mm)
in.
(mm) Ultimate Allow. Ultimate Allow. Ultimate Allow.
lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN)
1
3
600
150
935
235
760
190
1

(25.4) (76.2) (38.1) (2.7)
(0.7)
(4.2)
(1.0)
(3.4)
(0.8)
(6.4)
3
1,040
260
1,760
440
810
200
1
1
(1.2)
(7.8)
(2.0)
(3.6)
(0.9)
(38.1) (76.2) (38.1) (4.6)
(6.4)
Titen
Dia.
in.
(mm)

2. Concrete must be minimum 1.5 x embedment.
410 Stainless-Steel Titen Tension and Shear Load

Values in Face Shell of Hollow and Grout-Filled CMU
Values for 6" or 8" Lightweight,
Dia.
Dia.
Depth Spacing Edge Medium-Weight or Normal-Weight CMU
in.
in.
in.
in.
Dist.
Tension Load
Shear Load
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
in.
Ultimate Allow. Ultimate Allow.
(mm) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN) lbs. (kN)
1
4
550
110
495
100
1
(25.4) (101.6) (38.1) (2.4)

(0.5)
(2.2)
(0.4)
(6.4)
1. The tabulated allowable loads are based on a safety factor of 5.0 for
installations under the IBC and IRC. For installations under the UBC use
a safety factor of 4.0 (multiply the tabulated allowable loads by 1.25).
*
410 Stainless-Steel Titen Product Data
Size
(in)
Head
Style
Simpson
Model No.
x 1
TTN25114HSS
x 1
TTN25134HSS
x 2
TTN25214HSS
Hex
x 2
TTN25234HSS
Head
x 3
TTN25314HSS
x 3
TTN25334HSS
x 4
TTN25400HSS
x 1
TTN25114PFSS
x 1
TTN25134PFSS
x 2 Phillips TTN25214PFSS
x 2
Flat TTN25234PFSS
x 3 Head TTN25314PFSS
x 3
TTN25334PFSS
x 4
TTN25400PFSS
One drill bit is included in each box
68
Bit
Quantity
Dia.
Box
Carton
(in)
100 1600
100 500
100 500
100 500
100 400
100 400
100 400
100 1600
100 500
100 500
100 500
100 400
100 400
100 400
FINISH:
NAILON Pin Drive Anchors

Nylon and Zinc Nailon anchors are low cost anchors for
light-duty applications under static loads.
SPECIAL FEATURES:
Nylon Nailon anchor: The nylon shell acts as an insulator
when used In electrical applications.
Zinc Nailon anchor: Available with carbon and stainless-steel pins. The pin
and head configuration make this anchor tamper resistant.
MATERIAL: Nylon Body: nylon Pin Cold-rolled steel
Zinc Body die cast zinc alloy;
Pin Carbon and stainless steel (Type 304, A2)
CODES: Meets Federal Specification A-A-1925A,
Type 1 (zinc mushroom),
INSTALLATION: Contact Simpson Strong-Tie
Nylon NailonTM Anchor

(Mushroom, Round)
Nylon Nailon Product Data and Tension Loads in

Normal-Weight Concrete
Head
Style
R
M
R
R
M
R
M
M
R
M
Size
(in.)
x 1
x 1
x 1
x 1
x 2
x 3
Model
No.
Drill Bit Embed.

Dia.
Depth
(in.)
(in.)
N18100R
N18100M
N18112R
N25100R
N25100M
N25112R
N25112M
N25200M
N25200R
N25300M
Zinc NailonTM Anchor

(Mushroom)
Allowable
Tension
Load (kN)
Quantity
f'c 3000 psi

(19.2MPa)
Box Carton
0.10
0.12
0.10
0.18
0.22
0.22
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
1600
1600
500
1600
1600
500
500
400
400
200
Not for use in overhead applications

These anchors are not recommended for eccentric
tension (prying) loading. Capacity can be greatly
reduced in such applications.
R = Round Head; M = Mushroom Head
Zinc Nailon (Mushroom Head) Product Data and Tension and Shear Loads
in Normal-Weight Concrete
Size
(in.)
x
x
x 1
x 1
x 1
x 2
x 2
x 3
Carbon
Steel Pin
Model
No.
Stainless
Steel Pin
Model
No.
ZN18078
ZN25034
ZN25100
ZN25114
ZN25112
ZN25200
ZN25212
ZN25300
ZN25034SS
ZN25100SS
ZN25114SS
ZN25112SS
ZN25200SS
ZN25212SS
ZN25300SS
Drill Bit
Dia.
(in.)
Embed.
Depth
(in.)
1
1
1
2
2
Allowable Load (kN)

f'c 3000 psi (19.2MPa)
Tension
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
Shear
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
Quantity
Box
Carton
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1600
1600
500
500
500
400
400
400
1. The allowable loads listed are

based on a safety factor of 4.0.
69
HWA
Hollow Wall Anchors
The HWA hollow wall anchor expands inside the wall cavity to provide a large bearing area for transfer of loads.
The HWDA hollow wall drive anchor permits installation in gypsum drywall without pre-drilling.
MATERIAL: Expander shell Cold-rolled steel
INSTALLATION:
HWA:
Drill hole using the specified diameter bit noted in the table.
Tap anchor into hole until flush with surface.
Tighten screw while maintaining constant pressure on the anchor to set.
Remove screw, install through fixture; reinsert screw into anchor body and tighten until snug against base material.
HWDA:
Drive anchor into gypsum drywall until head is flush with surface.
Tighten screw to set anchor.
Remove screw, install through fixture; reinsert screw into anchor
body and tighten until snug against base material.
Size
(in.)
Model
No.
XS
S
L
S
L
S
L
HWA12XS
HWA12S
HWA12L
HWA18S
HWA18L
HWA25S
HWA25L
-
-
-
-
-1
-
-1
PSA
Drill Bit
Dia.
(in.)
Quantity
Box
Carton
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
1600
500
500
250
250
250
250
Size
(in.)
Model
No.
Base Material
Thickness
(in.)
Box
Carton
SD
LD
HWDA12SD
HWDA12LD
- (3-12mm)
- (16-21mm)
100
100
500
500
(Not required for HWDA)
The Plastic Screw Anchor is an expanding plastic shield that expands as the screw is tightened.
The PSA can be used in all types of base materials including concrete and gypsum drywall.
MATERIAL: Polyethylene plastic
INSTALLATION:
Caution: Oversized holes will make it difficult to set the anchor and will impact the anchor's
performance.
Drill a hole in the base material using the appropriate diameter carbide drill bit as specified
in the table. Drill the hole to the specified embedment depth plus " (3mm). For flush
mounting blow the hole clean with compressed air. Alternatively, drill the hole deep enough
to accommodate embedment depth and dust from drilling. Overhead installations need not be
blown clean.
Insert anchor into hole. Tap with hammer until flush with surface of base material.
Position fixture; insert screw and tighten.
PSA Product Data
70
Model
No.
Drill Bit
Dia.
(in.)
Embed.
Depth
(in.)
#6 - #8
#8 - #10
#10 - #12
#14 - #16
PSA06
PSA08
PSA10
PSA14
1
1
Quantity
Box
Carton
100
100
100
100
1600
1600
1600
500
Quantity
Plastic Screw Anchor
Screw
Size
HWDA
HWA Product Data

Base Material
Thickness
(in.)
HWA
HWDA Kit Product Data
Use caution not to over-tighten the anchor in drywall

applications as this can cause crushing.
PSA
SIMPSON STRONG-TIE HEAVY DUTY ANCHORS
SAFETY BOLT
SUPERPLUS
ULTRAPLUS
Page
LIEBIG ANCHOR
Type
P72
P77
P82
P89
Cracked
Concrete
Non-Cracked
Concrete
Option 1
Option 1
Option 1
Option 1
Anchoring
Principle
Hollow
Masonry
Solid
Masonry
ETA - Approval
Fire
Resistance
Sprinklers
Civil Defense
Extraordinary
Loads
Steel,
Zinc Plated
A4
Stainless Steel
Load Range
19~320.2
kN
4.3~56.1
kN
2.4~48.9
kN
2.4~37.2
kN
Calculation
Software
71
ULTRAPLUS
Undercut Anchor Systems
ULTRAPLUS M12 M36

The undercut anchor for exceptionally high loads in cracked and
non-cracked concrete also for shock and earthquake loads.
R 120
The ULTRAPLUS undercut anchor is designed for use in applications where
reliability and safety are essential, e.g. for anchoring safety relevant components in
nuclear power plants, for industrial plants, conveyor systems, cranes, and also for
special civil engineering solutions.
The ULTRAPLUS was developed to resist very high loads with its unique
undercutting technology. After the hole is drilled, a separate undercut is drilled
using the special undercutting tool. When the anchor is inserted through the fixture,
spring pressure opens the expanding segments. They lock into the undercut with a
clearly audible click. The result is a mechanical interlock without expansion
stresses. By applying the specified torque, the fixture is fastened in position. The
positive undercut allows perfect bearing of the segments and ensures reliable
transmission of the load into the concrete.
APPLICATIONS:
Steel construction
Industrial plants
Nuclear power plants
Conveyor systems
Cranes
Positive undercut anchor with

strong mechanical interlock
Immediately loadable
Through-fix installation
FEATURES:
Expansion pressure free
Small edge distances and spacings
Completely removable
BENEFITS:
Dependable fixing for high loads in cracked and non-cracked concrete

High safety margins due to positive undercutting
High strength threaded rod Grade 10.9
The spring automatically compensates for tolerances in the fixture thickness
Reduced edge distances and spacings
Custom lengths available
Proven performance history in resisting dynamic loads, shock loads, and
earthquakes. Expert reports available for these and other applications.
Positive undercutting (comparable performance to a cast-in headed stud)
FUNCTION: When the anchor is installed the expansion segments are driven down
to the undercut in the drilled hole. The spring pressure automatically expands the
segments into the undercut with an audible click. This results in a mechanical
undercut connection without any expansion pressure. The positive undercut
allows perfect bearing of the segments and ensures reliable transmission of the
load into the concrete.
MATERIAL:
Grade 10.9 carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
BASE MATERIAL: Cracked and non-cracked concrete: C20/25 to C50/60

APPROVAL: ETA-04/0099 Option 1 Carbon steel, zinc plated
LOAD RANGE:
Tension:
Shear:
Nperm= 19.0 - 320.2 [kN]

Vperm= 45.2 - 371.4 [kN]
PRODUCT RANGE: UP: M12 M36, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
UP with hex nut, washer, threaded

stud and plastic retaining ring
72
ULTRAPLUS
Installation
Drill hole.
Clean hole with a

blow pump.
Create the undercut

using LIEBIG undercutting tool (approximately
15 to 70 seconds depending on the anchor
size). Irrigate with water
while undercutting.
Install the LIEBIG

ULTRAPLUS undercut
anchor. The plastic
ring holding the undercutting segments
together will remain at
the fixture.
Apply the specified

installation torque using
a calibrated torque
wrench the ULTRAPLUS undercut anchor is
now installed and can
resist loads immediately!
The ULTRAPLUS
undercutting segments
open with an audible
"CLICK" as soon as they
reach the undercut.
90
* The undercutting tool is available in models for use in core drilling rigs or as a hand undercutting tool with lever.
Fixture
The plastic ring holding the segments

together
h remains
i as the
h fixture
The segments expand as soon

as they reach the undercut
The highstrength
bolt provides
a high safety
margin
icate the
The knurls indicate
edment depth
required embedment
The pretensioned spring provides constant pressure and
expands the undercut segments during installation
73
ULTRAPLUS
FIXING IN POWER PLANTS
ULTRAPLUS undercut anchors

offer high safety, especially where
extraordinary loads are present. With its
unique undercutting technology, the
ULTRAPLUS is the best solution.
The ULTRAPLUS undercut anchor can resist

high loads problem-free, even at close anchor
spacings. The application shown required a
load capacity of 294 kN per anchor.
Solution: ULTRAPLUS M36 with 630 mm
embedment depth in C50/60 concrete.
CHALLENGING APPLICATIONS
The ULTRAPLUS is the first choice

for unique applications with high loads.
74
INDUSTRIAL PLANTS/RETROFITS
ULTRAPLUS

ULTRAPLUS UP
Threaded stud with hex nut and washer

Material: Grade 10.9 carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
Approval: ETA-04/0099 Option 1
Type
Order Code
Thread
Size
x
Max.
Fixture
Depth of
Fixture
Hole
Drilled Hole Thickness
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Weight
Box
Quantity
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
UP M12-23/140/20
UP1223140020
M12
23 x 190
20
24
140
220
48.0
10
UP M16-30/220/30
UP1630220030
M16
30 x 300
30
32
220
325
123.0
UP M20-36/250/50
UP2036250050
M20
36 x 330
50
38
250
380
173.0
UP M24-45/280/60*
UP2445280060
M24
45 x 410
60
46
280
460
408.0
UP M36-67/420/100* UP3667420100
M36
67 x 570
100
68
420
700
1305.0
*Not included in approval. Available as special order.

Custom lengths available on request.
Installation Accessories
Core machine undercutting tool
Hand undercutting tool with lever
Diamond cutting blade (Durability is 30-60

holes depending on site conditions)
Compatible
ULTRAPLUS
Order Code
kg/pc
Compatible
ULTRAPLUS
Order Code
kg/pc
Compatible
ULTRAPLUS
Order Code
kg/10 pcs
M12
DH23
3.5
M12
D23
2.6
M12
DE23
0.5
M16
DH30
4.0
M16
D30
3.1
M16
DE30
1.0
M20
DH36
5.0
M20
D36
4.1
M20
DE36
1.2
M24
DH45
6.0
M24
D45
5.1
M24
DE45
2.1
M36
DH67
9.0
M36
D67
8.1
M36
DE67
3.3
Special lengths upon request.
75
ULTRAPLUS
Technical Data

Permissible loads for single anchors with no infl uencing edge distances or spacings. Loads are calculated using partial safety factors from ETAG 001
Material: Carbon steel, Grade 10.9, zinc plated and blue passivated
Thread size
M12
[mm]
140
Type UP...
M12-23/140/
M16
220
M16-30/220/
M20
250
M20-36/250/
M24
280
M24-45/280/
M36
420
M36-67/420/

Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
19.0
23.2
26.9
29.5
28.6
34.9
40.3
43.4
35.7
43.6
50.4
55.4
45.2
55.2
63.8
70.1
45.2
55.2
63.8
70.1
66.7
81.3
94.0
103.3
80.3
98.0
113.3
124.5
111.9
136.5
157.8
173.5
147.6
180.0
208.1
228.7
206.6
252.0
291.3
320.2
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
45.2
45.2
45.2
45.2
45.2
45.2
45.2
45.2
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
109.5
109.5
109.5
109.5
109.5
109.5
109.5
109.5
160.6
160.9
160.9
160.9
160.9
160.9
160.9
160.9
295.1
360.0
371.4
371.4
371.4
371.4
371.4
371.4
[Nm]
62.4
158.1
309.0
534.5
1881.7
140
420
140
210
140
240
-
220
660
220
330
220
360
3306)
250
750
250
375
250
400
3606)
280
840
280
420
280
500
-
420
1260
420
630
420
700
-
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible bending moments1) 5)

Mperm

hef
[mm]
scr,N
[mm]
smin
Minimum spacing
[mm]
ccr,N
Characteristic edge distance4)
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
[mm]
hmin
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Diameter of undercutting
Undercutting
Through-fix
Clearance
anchorage
hole in the
fixture
Installation on
threaded stud
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
df
dcut
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
23
190
35
6
30
300
47
8.5
36
330
53.5
8.75
45
410
74
14.5
67
570
105
19
df
[mm]
24
32
38
46
68
df
[mm]
14
18
22
26
39
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[Nm]
24
120
36
250
41
300
50
790
75
2000
Installed anchor
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approval and a partial safety factor for actions of F = 1.4. The permissible loads are
valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10 mm or smaller.
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without infl uencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c 10 hef or 60 d) concrete edge failure must be checked
per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A.
3) Concrete is considered non-cracked when the tensile stress within the concrete is L + R 0. In the absence of detailed verifi cation R = 3 N/mm can be assumed (L equals the
tensile stress within the concrete as a result of external loads, forces on anchors included).
4) If spacings or edge distances become smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N and/or c ccr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A must be performed. For
details, see ETA-04/0099.
5) The permissible bending moments are only valid for the threaded stud (e.g. in case of a distance mounting).
6) This hmin only applies when the remote face of the concrete is inspected to ensure there has been no break-through as a result of drilling. Otherwise hmin = 360 mm (M16) and hmin = 400
mm (M20).
76
SUPERPLUS
SELF-UNDERCUTTING ANCHOR
The undercut fixing system that does not require a special setting tool
R 120
The LIEBIG SUPERPLUS is available in zinc plated carbon steel and A4 stainless steel.
Its design offers the high load capacity and reliability of an undercut anchor, but with
the ease of installation of an expansion anchor. In contrast to competing undercut anchor
systems, the SUPERPLUS does not require special drill bits or setting tools. You need only
apply the torque to create the self-undercut.
FEATURES:
Typ ILS
High capacity in cracked and non-cracked concrete

High reliability due to undercut technology
Simple installation, no special drill bit or setting tool required
Applying torque creates undercut
Two approved embedment depths per diameter
Lower installed cost than traditional undercut anchors
Reduced edge distances and spacings
Shallow embedment depths
High tension and shear capacity
Economical
Typ BLS
APPLICATIONS:
Power plants
Steel and industrial plants
Cable trays
Machines
Facades
Base plates
Strut system
Subway cassions
FUNCTION: Automatically self-undercutting. The unique design of the

SUPERPLUS causes an undercut to be created when the installation torque is applied. As
torque is applied to the anchor the cone is drawn into the anchor sleeve and the sleeves
outer cutting teeth expand and undercut into the base material. This results in a durable
mechanical interlock with base material that functions in both cracked and non-cracked
concrete.
MATERIAL:
A4-80 stainless steel
APPROVAL:
ETA-01/0011 Option 1 Carbon steel, zinc plated
ETA-05/0013 Option 1 A4 stainless steel
LOAD RANGE:
Tension:
Shear:
Nperm= 4.3 - 56.1 [kN]

Vperm= 4.3 - 90.7 [kN]
PRODUCT RANGE:
BLS: M8, M12 and M16, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / A4 stainless steel
ILS: M8, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated
INSTALLATION: Through-fix installation shown
90
Drill hole

through fixture
Apply recommended
BLS with hex nut, washer and

threaded stud
ILS with internally treaded sleeve
77
SUPERPLUS

SUPERPLUS BLS
Approvals: ETA-01/0011 Option 1
Type
Order Code
Thread
Size
x
Max.Fixture
Depth of
Thickness
Drilled Hole
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
Weight
Box
Quantity
[pcs]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
BLS M8-14/40/15
BLS0814040015
M8
14 x 60
15
16
40
80
8.0
25
BLS M8-14/80/25
BLS0814080025
M8
14 x 100
25
16
80
130
13.4
25
BLS M12-20/80/15
BLS1220080015
M12
20 x 105
15
21
80
130
26.5
10
BLS M12-20/80/30
BLS1220080030
M12
20 x 105
30
21
80
145
29.5
10
BLS M12-20/150/30
BLS1220150030
M12
20 x 175
30
21
150
215
43.5
10
BLS M12-20/150/50
BLS1220150050
M12
20 x 175
50
21
150
235
46.0
10
BLS M16-25/150/30
BLS1625150030
M16
25 x 185
30
26
150
220
70.0
10
BLS M16-25/150/40
BLS1625150040
M16
25 x 185
40
26
150
230
72.0
10
BLS M16-25/150/60
BLS1625150060
M16
25 x 185
60
26
150
250
76.0
10
BLS M16-25/200/40
BLS1625200040
M16
25 x 235
40
26
200
280
89.0
10
BLS M16-25/200/60
BLS1625200060
M16
25 x 235
60
26
200
300
95.0
10
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
[pcs]
A4 stainless steel
SUPERPLUS BLS
Material: A4-80 stainless steel
Type
Order Code
Thread
Size
x
Max.Fixture
Depth of
Thickness
Drilled Hole
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
BLS M8-14/80/25A4
BLS0814080025A4
M8
14 x 100
25
16
80
130
13.4
25
BLS M12-20/80/15A4
BLS1220080015A4
M12
20 x 105
15
21
80
130
26.5
10
BLS M12-20/80/30A4
BLS1220080030A4
M12
20 x 105
30
21
80
145
29.5
10
BLS M16-25/150/30A4
BLS1625150030A4
M16
25 x 185
30
26
150
220
70.0
10
BLS M16-25/150/40A4
BLS1625150040A4
M16
25 x 185
40
26
150
230
72.0
10
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity

See page 63 for technical data.
Internally threaded, Carbon steel, zinc plated

SUPERPLUS ILS
Internally threaded sleeve
Type
ILS M8-14/80
Order Code
ILS0814080

78
Thread
Size
x
Max.Fixture
Depth of
Thickness
Drilled Hole
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
M8
14 x 100
10
80
93
8.7
25
SUPERPLUS
Technical Data

Thread size
Type BLS...
[mm]
M8
40
M8-14/40/
M8
80
M8-14/80/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M12
150
M12-20/150/
M16
150
M16-25/150/
M16
200
M16-25/200/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
4.3
5.2
6.0
6.6
6.1
7.4
8.6
9.4
7.6
9.3
10.7
10.8
10.8
10.8
10.8
10.8
11.9
14.5
16.8
18.5
17.2
21.0
24.3
26.7
19.0
23.2
26.9
28.4
28.4
28.4
28.4
28.4
23.8
29.0
33.6
36.9
44.1
53.0
53.0
53.0
35.7
43.6
50.4
53.0
53.0
53.0
53.0
53.0
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
4.3
5.3
6.1
6.7
6.1
7.4
8.6
9.4
23.7
23.7
23.7
23.7
23.7
23.7
23.7
23.7
24.6
30.0
34.6
38.1
34.4
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
63.0
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
67.4
[Nm]
17.1
17.1
60.0
60.0
152.0
152.0
40
120
100
60
80
100
80
240
80
120
50
160
80
240
120
120
100
160
150
450
150
225
80
300
150
450
200
225
150
300
200
600
150
300
100
400

Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

Mperm

[mm]
hef
[mm]
scr,N
Minimum spacing
[mm]
smin
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
[mm]
hmin
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Through-fix
Clearance anchorage
hole in the
Installation on
fixture
threaded stud
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
14
60
14
100
20
105
20
175
25
185
25
235
df
[mm]
16
16
21
21
26
26
df
[mm]
10
10
14
14
18
18
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[Nm]
17
25
17
25
22
80
22
80
27
180
27
180
Installed anchor
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approval and a partial safety factor for actions of F = 1.4. The permissible loads
are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10 mm or smaller.
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c 10 hef or 60 d) concrete edge failure must be
79
SUPERPLUS
Technical Data
A4 stainless steel
Thread size
Type BLS...
[mm]
M8
40
M8-14/40/
M8
80
M8-14/80/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M12
150
M12-20/150/
M16
150
M16-25/150/
M16
200
M16-25/200/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
4.3
5.2
6.0
6.6
6.1
7.4
8.6
9.4
5.7
7.0
8.1
8.9
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
11.9
14.5
16.8
18.5
17.2
21.0
24.3
26.7
19.0
23.2
26.9
29.5
30.1
30.1
30.1
30.1
28.6
34.9
40.3
44.3
44.1
53.8
56.1
56.1
28.6
34.9
40.3
44.3
56.1
56.1
56.1
56.1
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
4.3
5.3
6.1
6.7
6.1
7.4
8.6
9.4
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.6
30.0
34.6
38.1
34.4
42.0
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
48.5
63.0
76.8
88.8
90.7
88.2
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.7
[Nm]
16.1
16.1
56.4
56.4
142.9
142.9
40
120
80
60
60
100
80
240
80
120
50
160
80
240
150
120
100
160
150
450
150
225
80
300
150
450
150
225
100
300
200
600
180
300
100
400

Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible bending moment1) 4)

Mperm

[mm]
hef
[mm]
scr,N
Minimum spacing
smin
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
hmin
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Through-fix
Clearance anchorage
hole in the
Installation on
fixture
threaded stud
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
14
60
14
100
20
105
20
175
25
185
25
235
df
[mm]
16
16
21
21
26
26
df
[mm]
10
10
14
14
18
18
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[Nm]
17
25
17
25
22
80
22
80
27
180
27
180
Installed anchor
80
SUPERPLUS
Technical Data
Internally threaded anchor, Carbon steel, zinc plated

Permissible loads for single anchors with no influencing edge distances or spacings.
Loads are calculated using partial safety factors from ETAG 001 and the characteristic
anchor and installation data from this catalogue.
Installed anchor

Thread size
Type ILS...
[mm]
M8
80
M8-14/80
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
7.6
9.3
10.7
10.8
10.8
10.8
10.8
10.8
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
Grade 8.8

Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible shear loads1)2)

Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

hef
[mm]
80
scr, N
[mm]
240
Minimum spacing
smin
[mm]
80
Characteristic edge distance4)
ccr, N
[mm]
120
cmin
[mm]
50
hmin
[mm]
160
d0
h1
df
Le
Ti
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
14
100
10
12 to 23
4
8
25
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Threaded depth
Hexagon socket depth
Width across flats
Installation torque
Section A - A
1) The permissible loads have been calculated assuming that grade 8.8 fasteners are used and using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in ETA-01/0011 and a partial safety factor
for actions of F = 1.4. The permissible loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10
cm if the rebar is 10 mm or smaller.
81
SAFETY
TY BOLT
Type B
Type S
Type SK
SAFETY BOLT
Twin-cone heavy duty bolt with cylindrical expansion for increased anchoring
security.
R 120
Twin-cone sleeve anchor for high loads
Torque-controlled mechanical anchor
Solid, all-steel construction
FEATURES:
High capacity in cracked and non-cracked concrete

Cylindrical expansion of sleeve over entire length
Solid all-steel construction
Torque indication from domed washer
Steel construction
Railing
Gates
Lifting systems
APPLICATIONS:
Cable trays
Machines
Facades
Base plates
FUNCTION: Application of the installation torque causes the anchors two opposing
cones to be drawn into the expansion sleeve. This causes the sleeve to be pressed
against the sidewalls of the hole over its entire length and results in optimum frictional
resistance and high load capacity in cracked and non-cracked concrete.
MATERIAL:
A4-80 stainless steel (Type B), A4-70 stainless steel (Type S, SK)
APPROVAL: ETA-06/0108 Option 1 Carbon steel, zinc platedl
LOAD RANGE:
Tension:
Shear:
Nperm= 2.4 - 48.9 [kN]

Vperm= 5.2 - 80.6 [kN]
PRODUCT RANGE:
B: M6 M20, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / A4 stainless steel
S: M6 M20, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / M6 M12, A4 stainless steel
SK: M6 M16, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / M6 M12, A4 stainless
steel
INSTALLATION: Through-fix installation
90
Drill hole
82

through fixture
Apply recommended
with hex nut, domed washer

and threaded stud
with hex head screw and

domed washer
SK with countersunk headed

screw
SAFETY BOLT

SAFETY BOLT B
Threaded stud with hex nut and domed washer
New
Type
Old
Type
Order
Code
Thread
Size
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
Eff.
Fixture
Embedment
Hole
Depth
Total
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
Weight
Box
Quantity
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
B M6-10/45/5
B 10/20
LB0610045005
M6
10 x 60
12
45
70
2.7
50
B M6-10/45/15
B 10/35
LB0610045015
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
80
3.4
50
B M6-10/45/40
B 10/60
LB0610045040
M6
10 x 60
40
12
45
105
4.6
50
B M8-12/55/5
B 12/25
LB0812055005
M8
12 x 70
14
55
85
5.8
25
B M8-12/55/15
B 12/40
LB0812055015
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
95
7.0
25
B M8-12/55/40
B 12/65
LB0812055040
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
120
9.0
25
B M8-12/55/65
B 12/90
LB0812055065
M8
12 x 70
65
14
55
145
10.6
25
B M8-12/55/100
B 12/125
LB0812055100
M8
12 x 70
100
14
55
180
12.7
25
B M10-15/70/5
B 15/30
LB1015070005
M10
15 x 85
17
70
100
11.0
25
B M10-15/70/15
B 15/45
LB1015070015
M10
15 x 85
15
17
70
110
12.8
25
B M10-15/70/40
B 15/70
LB1015070040
M10
15 x 85
40
17
70
135
16.0
10
B M10-15/70/65
B 15/95
LB1015070065
M10
15 x 85
65
17
70
160
18.5
10
B M10-15/70/100
B 15/120
LB1015070100
M10
15 x 85
100
17
70
195
22.0
10
B M12-20/80/5
B 20/35
LB1220080005
M12
20 x 100
21
80
120
20.8
10
B M12-20/80/15
B 20/50
LB1220080015
M12
20 x 100
15
21
80
130
24.8
10
B M12-20/80/40
B 20/75
LB1220080040
M12
20 x 100
40
21
80
155
29.0
10
B M12-20/80/65
B 20/100
LB1220080065
M12
20 x 100
65
21
80
180
33.5
10
B M12-20/80/100
B 20/135
LB1220080100
M12
20 x 100
100
21
80
215
39.8
20
B M16-25/100/5
B 25/40
LB1625100005
M16
25 x 125
26
100
150
43.4
B M16-25/100/15
B 25/55
LB1625100015
M16
25 x 125
15
26
100
160
48.4
B M16-25/100/40
B 25/80
LB1625100040
M16
25 x 125
40
26
100
185
56.7
B M16-25/100/65
B 25/105
LB1625100065
M16
25 x 125
65
26
100
210
63.6
10
B M16-25/100/100
B 25/130
LB1625100100
M16
25 x 125
100
26
100
245
75.0
10
B M20-30/125/15*
B 30/65
B2030125015
M20
30 x 150
15
32
125
180
85.9
B M20-30/125/40*
B 30/90
B2030125040
M20
30 x 150
40
32
125
205
96.7
B M20-30/125/65*
B 30/115
B2030125065
M20
30 x 150
65
32
125
230
107.6
B M20-30/125/100* B 30/150
B2030125100
M20
30 x 150
100
32
125
265
122.0

83
SAFETY BOLT
Technical Data

[mm]
M6
45
M6-10/45/
M8
55
M8-12/55/
M10
70
M10-15/70/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M16
100
M16-25/100/
M207)
125
M20-30/125/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
2.4
2.9
3.4
3.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.6
3.6
4.4
5.0
5.5
4.8
5.8
6.7
7.4
7.6
9.3
10.7
11.8
9.5
11.6
13.4
14.8
12.3
15.0
17.3
19.0
17.2
21.0
24.2
26.6
17.1
20.9
24.2
26.6
24.0
29.3
33.8
37.2
18.6
22.7
26.2
28.8
31.6
38.5
44.5
48.9
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
5.2
6.3
7.3
8.0
7.2
8.6
8.6
8.6
7.0
8.5
9.9
10.8
9.8
11.9
13.8
14.3
20.1
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
24.5
29.8
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
41.7
48.5
53.1
48.0
54.9
54.9
54.9
49.2
59.8
61.6
76.3
68.9
80.6
80.6
80.6
[Nm]
6.9
17.1
34.3
60.0
152.0
296.6
45
135
60
67.5
80
100
55
165
100
82.5
100
110
70
210
150
105
150
140
80
240
200
120
200
160
100
300
250
150
250
200
125
375
195
185
350
250
Thread size
Type B...
Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

Mperm
Spacings, edge distances and and member thicknesses

[mm]
hef
[mm]
scr,N
[mm]
Minimum spacing
smin
Characteristic edge distance
ccr,N
[mm]
Minimum edge distance6)
[mm]
cmin
[mm]
hmin
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Through-fix
Clearance anchorage
hole in the
Installation on
fixture
threaded stud
Width across flats
Installation torque
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
10
60
12
70
15
85
20
100
25
125
30
150
df
[mm]
12
14
17
21
26
32
df
[mm]
12
14
18
22
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[Nm]
10
8
13
15
17
40
19
70
24
115
32
300
Installed anchor
Untorqued
Torqued
The permissible loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar
is 10 mm or smaller.
5) For spacings smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A shall be performed. For details, see ETA-06/0108.
6) The actual edge distance shall not be less than the value of cmin shown in the table.
7) Size M20 is not included in the approval.
84
SAFETY BOLT

SAFETY BOLT S
Hex head screw and domed washer
New
Type
Old
Type
Order
Code
S M6-10/45/5
S 10/20
LS0610045005
S M6-10/45/15
S 10/35
S M6-10/45/40
Thread
Size
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
d o x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
M6
10 x 60
12
45
70
2.7
50
LS0610045015
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
80
3.4
50
S 10/60
LS0610045040
M6
10 x 60
40
12
45
105
4.6
50
S M8-12/55/5
S 12/25
LS0812055005
M8
12 x 70
14
55
80
5.8
25
S M8-12/55/15
S 12/40
LS0812055015
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
90
7.0
25
S M8-12/55/40
S 12/65
LS0812055040
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
115
9.0
25
S M10-15/70/5
S 15/30
LS1015070005
M10
15 x 85
17
70
95
11.0
25
S M10-15/70/15
S 15/45
LS1015070015
M10
15 x 85
15
17
70
105
12.8
25
S M10-15/70/40
S 15/70
LS1015070040
M10
15 x 85
40
17
70
130
16.0
10
S M12-20/80/5
S 20/35
LS1220080005
M12
20 x 100
21
80
113
20.8
10
S M12-20/80/15
S 20/50
LS1220080015
M12
20 x 100
15
21
80
123
24.8
10
S M12-20/80/40
S 20/75
LS1220080040
M12
20 x 100
40
21
80
148
29.0
10
S M16-25/100/5
S 25/40
LS1625100005
M16
25 x 125
26
100
145
43.4
S M16-25/100/15
S 25/55
LS1625100015
M16
25 x 125
15
26
100
155
48.4
S M16-25/100/40
S 25/80
LS1625100040
M16
25 x 125
40
26
100
180
56.7
S M20-30/125/15*
S 30/65
S2030125015
M20
30 x 150
15
32
125
180
85.9
S M20-30/125/40*
S 30/90
S2030125040
M20
30 x 150
40
32
125
205
96.7
Weight
Box
Quantity

SAFETY BOLT SK
Countersunk head screw
New
Type
Old
Type
Order
Code
SK M6-10/45/6
SK 10/20
LSK0610045006
SK M6-10/45/15
SK 10/35
SK M6-10/45/40
Thread
Size
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
M6
10 x 60
12
45
60
2.7
50
LSK0610045015
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
70
3.4
50
SK 10/60
LSK0610045040
M6
10 x 60
40
12
45
95
4.6
50
SK M8-12/55/10
SK 12/25
LSK0812055010
M8
12 x 70
10
14
55
75
5.8
25
SK M8-12/55/15
SK 12/40
LSK0812055015
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
85
7.0
25
SK M8-12/55/40
SK 12/65
LSK0812055040
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
110
9.0
25
SK M10-15/70/10
SK 15/30
LSK1015070010
M10
15 x 85
10
17
70
90
11.0
25
SK M10-15/70/15
SK 15/45
LSK1015070015
M10
15 x 85
15
17
70
100
12.8
25
SK M10-15/70/40
SK 15/70
LSK1015070040
M10
15 x 85
40
17
70
120
16.0
25
SK M12-20/80/15
SK 20/50
LSK1220080015
M12
20 x 100
15
21
80
110
24.8
10
SK M12-20/80/40
SK 20/75
LSK1220080040
M12
20 x 100
40
21
80
135
29.0
10
SK M16-25/100/15
SK 25/55
LSK1625100015
M16
25 x 125
15
26
100
135
48.4
SK M16-25/100/40
SK 25/80
LSK1625100040
M16
25 x 125
40
26
100
160
56.7
85
SAFETY BOLT
Technical Data

.
[mm]
M6
45
M6-10/45/
M8
55
M8-12/55/
M10
70
M10-15/70/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M16
100
M16-25/100/
M206)
125
M20-30/125/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
2.4
2.9
3.4
3.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.6
3.6
4.4
5.0
5.5
4.8
5.8
6.7
7.4
7.6
9.3
10.7
11.8
9.5
11.6
13.4
14.8
12.3
15.0
17.3
19.0
17.2
21.0
24.2
26.6
17.1
20.9
24.2
26.6
24.0
29.3
33.8
37.2
18.6
22.7
26.2
28.8
31.6
38.5
44.5
48.9
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
5.2
6.3
7.3
8.0
7.2
8.6
8.6
8.6
7.0
8.5
9.9
10.8
9.8
11.9
13.8
14.3
20.1
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
24.5
29.8
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
41.7
48.5
53.1
48.0
54.9
54.9
54.9
49.2
59.8
69.6
76.3
68.9
80.6
80.6
80.6
Thread size
Type S..., SK
Cracked
concrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

Minimum spacing
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Clearance
Through-fix
hole in the
anchorage
fixture
S
Width across flat
SK
S
Installation torque
SK
hef
scr,N
smin
ccr,N
cmin
hmin
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
45
135
60
67.5
80
100
55
165
100
82.5
100
110
70
210
150
105
150
140
80
240
200
120
200
160
100
300
250
150
250
200
125
375
195
185
350
250
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
10
60
12
70
15
85
20
100
25
125
30
150
df
[mm]
12
14
17
21
26
32
sw
sw
Tinst
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
10
4
8
12
13
5
20
20
17
6
60
60
19
8
90
90
24
10
170
190
32
300
-
Installed anchor
Countersunk washer
Size
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
20
24
27
33
50
10
12
15
19
24
5,5
6,5
7
8
14
2) The permissible shear loads are based on a single anchor without influencing concrete edges. For shear loads applied close to an edge (c 10 hef or 60d) concrete edge failure must be
4) For spacings smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N ) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A shall be performed. For details, see ETA-06/0108.
6) Size M20 is not included in the approval.
86
SAFETY BOLT
A4 stainless steel
SAFETY BOLT B
New
Type
B M6-10/45/5 A4
B M6-10/45/15 A4
B M6-10/45/40 A4
B M8-12/55/5 A4
B M8-12/55/15 A4
B M8-12/55/40 A4
B M10-15/70/5 A4
B M10-15/70/15 A4
B M10-15/70/40 A4
B M12-20/80/5 A4
B M12-20/80/15 A4
B M12-20/80/40 A4
B M16-25/100/15 A4
B M16-25/100/40 A4
B M20-30/125/40 A4
Old
Type
B 10/20 A4
B 10/35 A4
B 10/60 A4
B 12/25 A4
B 12/40 A4
B 12/65 A4
B 15/30 A4
B 15/45 A4
B 15/70 A4
B 20/35 A4
B 20/50 A4
B 20/75 A4
B 25/55 A4
B 25/80 A4
B 30/90 A4
Order
Code
B0610045005A4
B0610045015A4
B0610045040A4
B0812055005A4
B0812055015A4
B0812055040A4
B1015070005A4
B1015070015A4
B1015070040A4
B1220080005A4
B1220080015A4
B1220080040A4
B1625100015A4
B1625100040A4
B2030125040A4
Thread
Size
[mm]
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M16
M16
M20
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
do x h1
[mm]
10 x 60
10 x 60
10 x 60
12 x 70
12 x 70
12 x 70
15 x 85
15 x 85
15 x 85
20 x 95
20 x 95
20 x 95
25 x 125
25 x 125
30 x 150
tfix
[mm]
5
15
40
5
15
40
5
15
40
5
15
40
15
40
40
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
df
[mm]
12
12
12
14
14
14
17
17
17
21
21
21
26
26
32
hef
[mm]
45
45
45
55
55
55
70
70
70
80
80
80
100
100
125
L
[mm]
70
80
105
85
95
120
100
110
135
120
130
155
160
185
205
[kg/100 pcs]
2.7
3.4
4.6
5.8
7.0
9.0
11.0
12.8
16.0
20.8
24.8
29.0
48.4
56.7
96.7
[pcs]
50
50
50
25
25
25
25
25
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
df
[mm]
12
12
14
14
17
17
21
21
hef
[mm]
45
45
55
55
70
70
80
80
L
[mm]
80
105
90
115
105
130
123
148
[kg/100 pcs]
3.4
4.6
7.0
9.0
12.8
16.0
24.8
29.0
[pcs]
50
50
25
25
25
10
10
10
Fixture
Hole
Eff.
Embedment
Depth
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
df
[mm]
12
12
14
14
17
17
21
21
hef
[mm]
45
45
55
55
70
70
80
80
L
[mm]
70
95
85
110
100
125
110
135
[kg/100 pcs]
3.4
4.6
7.0
9.0
12.8
16.0
24.8
29.0
[pcs]
50
50
25
25
25
25
10
10
SAFETY BOLT S
New
Type
S M6-10/45/15 A4
S M6-10/45/40 A4
S M8-12/55/15 A4
S M8-12/55/40 A4
S M10-15/70/15 A4
S M10-15/70/40 A4
S M12-20/80/15 A4
S M12-20/80/40 A4
Old
Type
S 10/35 A4
S 10/60 A4
S 12/40 A4
S 12/65 A4
S 15/45 A4
S 15/70 A4
S 20/50 A4
S 20/75 A4
Order
Code
S0610045015A4
S0610045040A4
S0812055015A4
S0812055040A4
S1015070015A4
S1015070040A4
S1220080015A4
S1220080040A4
Thread
Size
[mm]
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
M12
M12
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
do x h1
[mm]
10 x 60
10 x 60
12 x 70
12 x 70
15 x 85
15 x 85
20 x 95
20 x 95
tfix
[mm]
15
40
15
40
15
40
15
40
SAFETY BOLT SK
Countersunk head screw
New
Type
SK M6-10/45/15 A4
SK M6-10/45/40 A4
SK M8-12/55/15 A4
SK M8-12/55/40 A4
SK M10-15/70/15 A4
SK M10-15/70/40 A4
SK M12-20/80/15 A4
SK M12-20/80/40 A4
Old
Type
SK 10/35 A4
SK 10/60 A4
SK 12/40 A4
SK 12/65 A4
SK 15/45 A4
SK 15/70 A4
SK 20/50 A4
SK 20/75 A4
Order
Code
SK0610045015A4
SK0610045040A4
SK0812055015A4
SK0812055040A4
SK1015070015A4
SK1015070040A4
SK1220080015A4
SK1220080040A4
Thread
Size
[mm]
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10
M12
M12
x
Max.
Depth of
Fixture
do x h1
[mm]
10 x 60
10 x 60
12 x 70
12 x 70
15 x 85
15 x 85
20 x 95
20 x 95
tfix
[mm]
15
40
15
40
15
40
15
40
87
SAFETY BOLT
Technical Data
A4 stainless steel
Material: A4-80 stainless steel (Type B), A4-70 stainless steel (Type S, SK)
Thread size
Type B.... S. SK
[mm]
M6
45
M6-10/45/
M8
55
M8-12/55/
M10
70
M10-15/70/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M16
100
M16-25/100/
M20
125
M20-30/125/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
3.2
3.9
4.5
5.0
4.3
5.2
6.1
6.7
7.1
8.6
10.0
11.0
7.1
8.4
9.5
10.5
10.7
12.6
14.3
15.8
10.7
12.6
14.3
15.8
16.0
18.8
21.4
23.7
15.5
18.3
20.8
22.9
23.2
27.4
31.1
34.3
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
3.2
3.9
4.5
5.0
4.3
5.2
6.1
6.7
7.1
8.6
10.0
11.0
[Nm]
6.5
16.1
32.1
56.1
142.7
278.1

[mm]
45
hef
scr, N
[mm]
140
Minimum spacing
[mm]
140
smin
[mm]
80
ccr, N
cmin
[mm]
80
hmin
[mm]
100
55
165
165
120
120
110
70
235
235
165
165
140
80
240
120
120
210
150
100
300
150
150
270
200
125
375
195
195
350
250
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Permissible bending moments1)4)

Mperm
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Through-fix
Clearance anchorage
hole in the
Installation on
fixture
threaded stud
B
Width across flat
S
SK
B
Installation torque
S
SK
B
20.5
24.2
27.5
28.9
28.7
28.9
28.9
28.9
S/SK
20.5
24.2
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
B
28.6
33.7
38.3
42.3
40.0
47.2
49.5
49.5
S/SK
28.6
33.7
38.3
41.5
40.0
41.5
41.5
41.5
B
39.9
47.1
53.5
59.1
55.9
66.0
67.4
67.4
S/SK
39.9
47.1
53.5
59.1
55.9
61.6
61.6
61.6
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
10
60
12
70
15
85
20
95
25
125
30
150
df
[mm]
12
14
17
21
26
32
df
[mm]
12
14
18
22
sw
sw
sw
Tinst
Tinst
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
10
10
4
10
10
10
13
13
5
25
25
25
17
17
6
50
50
50
19
19
8
80
80
80
24
180
-
30
300
-
Installed anchor
Countersunk washer
Size
M6
M8
M10
M12
D
[mm]
20
24
27
33
d
[mm]
10
12
15
19
k
[mm]
5,5
6,5
7
8
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using partial safety factors for resistances and a partial safety factor for actions of F = 1.4.
5) For spacings smaller than the characteristic values (i.e. s scr,N ) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A shall be performed.
88
Cracked
concrete
LIEBIG ANCHOR Expansion Anchor Systems
Typ AB
Typ AS
LIEBIG ANCHOR
General purpose heavy duty anchor.
R 120
Heavy duty anchor for high loads
Torque-controlled mechanical anchor
FEATURES:
Economical high capacity anchor
Approved for use in cracked and non-cracked concrete
Torque indication from domed washer
APPLICATIONS:
Steel construction
Railing
Gates
Lifting systems
Cable trays
Machines
Facades
Base plates
FUNCTION: Application of the installation torque draws the anchors cone into the
thick-walled expansion sleeve. This causes the sleeve to be pressed against the sidewalls
of the hole and develops tension resistance through friction.
MATERIAL:
A4-80 stainless steel (Type AB), A4-70 stainless steel (Type AS)
APPROVAL: ETA-06/0123 Option 1 Carbon steel, zinc plated
LOAD RANGE:
Tension:
Shear:
Nperm= 2.4 - 37.2 [kN]

Vperm= 5.2 - 54.9 [kN]
PRODUCT RANGE:
AB: M6 - M16, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / A4 stainless steel
AS: M6 - M16, carbon steel, zinc plated and blue passivated / M6 - M12, A4 stainless steel
INSTALLATION: Through-fix installation shown
90
Drill hole

through fixture
Apply recommended
AB with hex nut, domed washer

and threaded stud
AS with hex head screw and
domed washer
89

LIEBIG ANCHOR AB
New Type
AB M6-10/45/5
AB M6-10/45/15
AB M6-10/45/40
AB M8-12/55/5
AB M8-12/55/15
AB M8-12/55/40
AB M8-12/55/65
AB M8-12/55/100
AB M10-15/65/5
AB M10-15/65/15
AB M10-15/65/40
AB M10-15/65/65
AB M10-15/65/100
AB M12-20/80/5
AB M12-20/80/15
AB M12-20/80/40
AB M12-20/80/65
AB M12-20/80/100
AB M16-25/100/5
AB M16-25/100/15
AB M16-25/100/40
AB M16-25/100/65
AB M16-25/100/100
Old Type
AB 10/0
AB 10/15
AB 10/40
AB 12/0
AB 12/15
AB 12/40
AB 12/65
AB 15/0
AB 15/15
AB 15/40
AB 15/65
AB 20/0
AB 20/15
AB 20/40
AB 20/65
AB 25/0
AB 25/15
AB 25/40
AB 25/65
-
Order Code
LAB0610045005
LAB0610045015
LAB0610045040
LAB0812055005
LAB0812055015
LAB0812055040
LAB0812055065
LAB0812055100
LAB1015065005
LAB1015065015
LAB1015065040
LAB1015065065
LAB1015065100
LAB1220080005
LAB1220080015
LAB1220080040
LAB1220080065
LAB1220080100
LAB1625100005
LAB1625100015
LAB1625100040
LAB1625100065
LAB1625100100
ThreadSize
Eff.
Depth
Max.
Fixture
Embedment
of Drilled Fixture
Hole
Depth
Hole
Thickness
Total
Length
Weight
Box
Quantity
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12
M12
M12
M12
M12
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
10 x 60
10 x 60
10 x 60
12 x 70
12 x 70
12 x 70
12 x 70
12 x 70
15 x 85
15 x 85
15 x 85
15 x 85
15 x 85
20 x 100
20 x 100
20 x 100
20 x 100
20 x 100
25 x 125
25 x 125
25 x 125
25 x 125
25 x 125
5
15
40
5
15
40
65
100
5
15
40
65
100
5
15
40
65
100
5
15
40
65
100
12
12
12
14
14
14
14
14
17
17
17
17
17
21
21
21
21
21
26
26
26
26
26
45
45
45
55
55
55
55
55
65
65
65
65
65
80
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
100
70
80
105
85
95
120
145
180
100
110
135
160
195
120
130
155
180
215
150
160
185
210
245
2.7
3.4
4.6
5.8
7.0
9.0
10.6
12.8
11.0
12.8
16.0
18.5
22.0
20.8
24.8
29.0
33.5
39.8
43.4
48.4
56.7
63.6
73.3
50
50
50
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
5
5
5
10
10
Weight
Box
Quantity
LIEBIG ANCHOR AS
New Type
Old Type
Depth
Max.
Eff.
Fixture
of Drilled Fixture
Embedment
Hole
Hole
Thickness
Depth
Total
Length
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
AS M6-10/45/5
AS 10/0
LAS0610045005
M6
10 x 60
12
45
70
2.7
50
AS M6-10/45/15
AS 10/15
LAS0610045015
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
80
3.4
50
AS M6-10/45/40
AS 10/40
LAS0610045040
M6
10 x 60
40
12
45
105
4.6
50
AS M8-12/55/5
AS 12/0
LAS0812055005
M8
12 x 70
14
55
80
5.8
25
AS M8-12/55/15
AS 12/15
LAS0812055015
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
90
7.0
25
AS M8-12/55/40
AS 12/40
LAS0812055040
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
115
9.0
25
AS M10-15/65/5
AS 15/0
LAS1015065005
M10
15 x 85
17
65
95
11.0
25
AS M10-15/65/15
AS 15/15
LAS1015065015
M10
15 x 85
15
17
65
105
12.8
25
AS M10-15/65/40
AS 15/40
LAS1015065040
M10
15 x 85
40
17
65
130
16.0
10
AS M12-20/80/5
AS 20/0
LAS1220080005
M12
20 x 100
21
80
113
20.8
10
AS M12-20/80/15
AS 20/15
LAS1220080015
M12
20 x 100
15
21
80
123
24.8
10
AS M12-20/80/40
AS 20/40
LAS1220080040
M12
20 x 100
40
21
80
148
29.0
10
AS M16-25/100/15
AS 25/15
LAS1625100015
M16
25 x 125
15
26
100
155
48.4
AS M16-25/100/40
AS 25/40
LAS1625100040
M16
25 x 125
40
26
100
180
56.7
90
Order Code
ThreadSize

LIEBIG ANCHOR Technical Data

and the characteristic anchor and installation data from this catalogue. Design calculations shall follow the requirements of ETA-06/0123.
Thread size
Type AB..., AS...
[mm]
M6
45
M6-10/45/
M8
55
M8-12/55/
M10
65
M10-15/65/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M16
100
M16-25/100/
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
2.4
2.9
3.4
3.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.6
3.6
4.4
5.0
5.5
4.8
5.8
6.7
7.4
7.6
9.3
10.7
11.8
9.5
11.6
13.4
14.8
12.3
15.0
17.3
19.0
17.1
20.9
24.2
26.6
17.1
20.9
24.2
26.6
24.0
29.3
33.8
37.2
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
5.2
6.3
7.3
8.0
7.2
8.6
8.6
8.6
7.0
8.5
9.9
10.8
9.8
11.9
13.8
14.3
18.0
21.9
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
24.5
29.8
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
34.3
41.7
48.5
53.1
48.0
54.9
54.9
54.9
[Nm]
6.9
17.1
34.3
60
152
45
135
60
67.5
80
100
55
165
80
82.5
100
110
65
195
130
97.5
130
130
80
240
200
120
200
160
100
300
300
150
300
200

Cracked
conctrete
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
Cracked
conctrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

Mperm4)

[mm]
hef
scr,N
[mm]
Minimum spacing
smin
[mm]
[mm]
ccr,N
cmin
[mm]
hmin
[mm]
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Through-fix
Clearance anchorage
hole in the
Installation on
fixture
threaded stud
AB
Width across flats
AS
AB
Installation torque
AS
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
10
60
12
70
15
85
20
100
25
125
df
[mm]
12
14
17
21
26
df
[mm]
12
14
18
sw
sw
Tinst
Tinst
[mm]
[mm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
10
10
7
8
13
13
15
20
17
17
30
50
19
19
50
75
24
24
115
170
Installed anchor
1) The permissible loads have been calculated using the partial safety factors for resistances stated in the ETA-approval and a partial safety factor for actions of F = 1.4. The permissible
loads are valid for unreinforced concrete and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 15 cm and reinforced concrete with a rebar spacing s 10 cm if the rebar is 10 mm or smaller.
4) The permissible bending moments are only valid for the threaded stud type AB (e.g. in case of a distance mounting).
5) For spacings smaller than the characteristic values ((i.e. s scr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A shall be performed.
91

A4 stainless steel
LIEBIG ANCHOR AB
New Type
Old Type
Order Code
ThreadSize
Eff.
Depth
Max.
Total
Fixture
Embedment
of Drilled Fixture
Length
Hole
Depth
Hole
Thickness
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Weight
Box
Quantity
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
AB M6-10/45/5 A4
AB 10/0 A4
AB0610045005A4
M6
10 x 60
12
45
70
2.9
50
AB M6-10/45/15 A4
AB 10/15 A4
AB0610045015A4
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
80
3.4
50
AB M6-10/45/40 A4
AB 10/40 A4
AB0610045040A4
M6
10 x 60
40
12
45
105
4.6
50
AB M8-12/55/5 A4
AB 12/0 A4
AB0812055005A4
M8
12 x 70
14
55
85
6.2
25
AB M8-12/55/15 A4
AB 12/15 A4
AB0812055015A4
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
95
7.0
25
AB M8-12/55/40 A4
AB 12/40 A4
AB0812055040A4
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
120
9.0
25
AB M10-15/65/5 A4
AB 15/0 A4
AB1015065005A4
M10
15 x 85
17
65
100
11.5
25
AB M10-15/65/15 A4
AB 15/15 A4
AB1015065015A4
M10
15 x 85
15
17
65
110
12.8
25
AB M10-15/65/40 A4
AB 15/40 A4
AB1015065040A4
M10
15 x 85
40
17
65
135
16.0
10
AB M12-20/80/5 A4
AB 20/0 A4
AB1220080005A4
M12
20 x 95
21
80
120
25.1
10
AB M12-20/80/15 A4
AB 20/15 A4
AB1220080015A4
M12
20 x 95
15
21
80
130
24.8
10
AB M12-20/80/40 A4
AB 20/40 A4
AB1220080040A4
M12
20 x 95
40
21
80
155
29.0
10
AB M16-25/100/15 A4 AB 25/15 A4
AB1625100015A4
M16
25 x 125
15
26
100
160
48.4
AB M16-25/100/40 A4 AB 25/40 A4
AB1625100040A4
M16
25 x 125
40
26
100
185
56.7
Weight
Box
Quantity
LIEBIG ANCHOR AS
New Type
Old Type
Eff.
Depth
Max.
Total
Fixture
Embedment
of Drilled Fixture
Length
Hole
Depth
Hole
Thickness
do x h1
tfix
df
hef
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg/100 pcs]
[pcs]
AS M6-10/45/5 A4
AS 10/0 A4
AS0610045005A4
M6
10 x 60
12
45
70
2.9
50
AS M6-10/45/15 A4
AS 10/15 A4
AS0610045015A4
M6
10 x 60
15
12
45
80
3.4
50
AS M8-12/55/15 A4
AS 12/15 A4
AS0812055015A4
M8
12 x 70
15
14
55
90
7.0
25
AS M8-12/55/40 A4
AS 12/40 A4
AS0812055040A4
M8
12 x 70
40
14
55
115
9.0
25
AS M10-15/65/15 A4
AS 15/15 A4
AS1015065015A4
M10
15 x 85
15
17
65
105
12.8
25
AS M10-15/65/40 A4
AS 15/40 A4
AS1015065040A4
M10
15 x 85
40
17
65
130
16.0
10
AS M12-20/80/15 A4
AS 20/15 A4
AS1220080015A4
M12
20 x 95
15
21
80
123
24.8
10
AS M12-20/80/40 A4
AS 20/40 A4
AS1220080040A4
M12
20 x 95
40
21
80
148
29.0
10
92
Order Code
ThreadSize

LIEBIG ANCHOR Technical Data

A4 stainless steel
Permissible loads for single anchors with no influencing edge distances or spacings. Loads are calculated using partial safety factors from ETAG 001 and
the characteristic anchor and installation data from this catalogue.
Material: A4 Stainless steel
Thread size
Type AB..., AS...
Cracked
C20/25
concrete
C30/37
Nperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)

Cracked
concrete
Vperm
Non-cracked
concrete3)
[mm]
M6
45
M6-10/45/
M8
55
M8-12/55/
M10
65
M10-15/65/
M12
80
M12-20/80/
M16
100
M16-25/100/
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
3.2
3.9
4.5
5.0
4.3
5.2
6.1
6.7
7.1
8.6
10.0
11.0
7.1
8.4
9.5
10.5
10.7
12.6
14.3
15.8
10.7
12.6
14.3
15.8
16.0
18.8
21.4
23.7
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
C20/25
C30/37
C40/50
C50/60
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
[kN]
3.2
3.9
4.5
5.0
4.3
5.2
6.1
6.7
7.1
8.6
10.0
11.0
6.5
16.1
32.1
56.1
142.7

Mperm4)
[Nm]
Spacings, edge distances and and member ticknesses
Minimum spacing
AB
AS
AB
AS
20.5
24.2
27.5
28.9
28.7
28.9
28.9
28.9
20.5
24.2
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
24.6
28.6
33.7
38.3
42.3
40.0
47.2
49.5
49.5
28.6
33.7
38.3
41.5
40.0
41.5
41.5
41.5
hef
scr, N
smin
ccr, N
cmin
hmin
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
45
140
140
80
80
100
55
165
165
120
120
110
65
235
235
165
165
130
80
240
80
120
160
150
100
300
100
150
200
200
d0
h1
[mm]
[mm]
10
60
12
70
15
85
20
95
25
125
df
[mm]
12
14
17
21
26
df
[mm]
12
14
18
sw
Tinst
[mm]
[Nm]
10
10
13
25
17
50
19
80
24
180
Installation data
Drill hole diameter
Drill hole depth
Clearance Through-fix
hole in the anchorage
fixture
Installation on
threaded stud
Width across flats
AB, AS
Installation torque
AB, AS
Installed anchor
4) The permissible bending moments are only valid for the threaded stud type AB (e.g. in case of a distance mounting).
5) For spacings smaller than the characteristic values ((i.e. s scr,N) a calculation per ETAG 001, Annex C, design method A shall be performed.
93
GAS AND POWDER-ACTUATED FASTENING SYSTEMS

A full line of gas and powderactuated tools for maximum
production and ease of use
Gas-actuated tool, fuel and
pins for high-production
fastening of gyp board track,
furring strips, hat track,
lathing and form boards to
concrete, steel, metal deck
and CMU
GCN150
Premium and fully-automatic

P.A.T. tools with power
regulators, low noise and
recoil. Easy disassembly for
quick maintenance
Heavy-duty P.A.T. tools for

difficult applications
Powder-actuated loads
and fasteners for Simpson
Strong-Tie tools and most
other major brands
PTP-27ASMAGR
with Rotating Magazine
P27SL Powder strip load
.27 Caliber strip loads for

semi and automatic tools
with fastener magazines
PAT Fasteners
Gas Actuated fuel and

collated nails for Simpson
Strong-Tie 's GCN tool
GFC34
Fuel Cell
94
GDP Strip Nail
Semi-automatic P.A.T. tools

for easy field repair and
maintenance
GCN150
Gas-Actuated Concrete Nailer
The GCN150 gas-actuated concrete nailer is a portable

fastening tool for attaching light-duty fixtures such as
drywall track, furring strips lathing, hat track and angle
track to concrete, steel, CMU and metal deck. The GCN150
has a portable gas fuel supply that does not require
electrical cords or hoses. The GCN150 sets up quickly and
offers maximum productivity. With a 500 shot-per-hour
capacity and a pin jam release door, the GCN150 makes
fastening pins fast and easy. Additional attributes include
2-step pin loading into the magazine, light and wellbalanced weight, a battery indicator light and a sure-grip
rubber handle pad.
FEATURES:
Fast: 40 pin magazine and 1,000 shot fuel cell
for reduced loading time
Easy to use: Automatic piston reset
Easy open jam release door
No operators license required
Portable: No hoses, cords, or external energy
source required
Convenient: Simple 2-step pin loading, and
open-blade guide-jam release
Easy-load fuel compartment
No possibility of firing without pins - when tool
is down to last 2 pins in the pin magazine a
"lock off" occurs
SPECIFICATIONS:
Tool dimensions: Length 44cm,
Width 10.7cm, Height 39cm
Weight: 3.7kgs
Magazine capacity: 42 nails
Average number of fastens per fuel cell: 1,000
Average number of fastens per battery charge: 3,300
Average battery charge time: 2 hours
Fastener type: Length 12.7mm to 38mm,
Fastener Diameter 2.6mm to 3.0mm
KEY FASTENING APPLICATIONS:
Drywall track to concrete, steel, CMU or metal deck
Furring strips to concrete, steel or CMU
Plywood to concrete, steel or CMU
Angle track to concrete, steel or metal deck
Concrete form board work
Lathing to concrete or plaster
TOOL IS SOLD IN RUGGED FIXTURED
TOOL BOX AND INCLUDES:
2 Batteries
1 Charger
Safety glasses
Ear protection
Operators manual
Tool schematic
Tool cleaning instructions
Easy open jam release door
Replacement Parts:
Model
Description
GCN-APP013
GCN-CHG008
GCN-PPA019
Adaptor (International)
Charger (International)
Battery (International)
95
GCN150
Gas-Actuated Concrete Nailer
Fuel Cell
The GFC34 fuel cell is designed to work with the GCN150 gas-actuated concrete nailer as
well as with most major brand gas concrete-nailer tools. The fuel cell offers 1,000 shots and
can operate at temperatures as low as -7 C.
Gas Fuel Cells for the GCN150
Model No.
Description
Pack Qty
Packs/ Carton
Compatible with
these Tools
GFC34
34 gram fuel cell
72
Simpson Strong-Tie
GCN150
Others: TF1100, C3
GFC34
Pins
GDP concrete pins are designed to work with the GCN150 gas-actuated concrete nailer tool as
well as with most major brand gas concrete-nailer tools. The 10 strip patent-pending collation
is design with break-away plastic. The pins are designed for use in A36 and A572 steel,
concrete and CMU block.
2.7mm Diameter Shank Drive Pins for the GCN150
Qty Pins / pack
Packs/
Carton
GDP-50
12.7
1,000
GDP-62
16.0
1,000
GDP-75
19.0
1,000
GDP-100
25.4
1,000
GDP-125
31.8
1,000
GDP-150
38.0
1,000
Compatible with
these Tools
Simpson
Strong-Tie
GCN150
Others:
TF1100, C3
GDP
(Patent Pending)
Length
(mm)
Model No.
25mm Lathing Washer

For installation of wire lathing, use with Simpson Strong-Tie GMR magnetic ring adaptor and
install with any size Simpson GDP pin. 1,000 washers per pack.
GWL-100
Tension Loads in Normal-Weight Concrete
Shank
Minimum
Diameter Penetration
mm
mm
(in.)
(in.)
2.7
(0.106)
16
()
19
()
Minimum
Tension Loads
Minimum
Edge
Spacing f'c 13.8 Mpa (2000 psi) f'c 20.7 Mpa (3000 psi) f'c 27.6 Mpa (4000 psi) f'c 34.5 Mpa (5000 psi)
Distance
mm
mm
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
(in.)
(in.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
76
(3)
102
(4)
0.11
(25)
0.13
(30)
0.20
(45)
0.22
(50)
0.13
(30)
0.13
(30)
0.13
(30)
0.13
(30)
1. The fasteners must not be driven until the concrete has reached the designated minimum compressive strength.
2. Minimum concrete thickness must be three times the fastener embedment into the concrete.
3. The allowable shear values are only for the fasteners in the concrete. Members connected to the concrete must
be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria.
Shear Loads in Normal-Weight Concrete

Minimum
Shear Loads
Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Edge
Spacing f'c 13.8 Mpa (2000 psi) f'c 20.7 Mpa (3000 psi) f'c 27.6 Mpa (4000 psi) f'c 34.5 Mpa (5000 psi)
Distance
mm
mm
mm
mm
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
Allow. Load
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
2.7
(0.106)
16
()
19
()
76
(3)
102
(4)
0.11
(25)
0.11
(25)
0.11
(25)
0.11
(25)
0.20
(45)
0.24
(55)
0.33
(75)
0.36
(80)
1. The fasteners must not be driven until the concrete has reached the designated minimum compressive strength.
2. Minimum concrete thickness must be three times the fastener embedment into the concrete.
3. The allowable shear values are only for the fasteners in the concrete. Members connected to the concrete must
be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria.
96
PTP-27ASX & PTP-27ASMAGR
Premium Tools
FEATURES:
PTP-27ASX: Automatic fastening: no sliding
barrel, just load and shoot
PTP-27ASMAGR: Fully automatic tool with
rotating fastener magazine
Both Tools Feature:
Adjustable power for fastening versatility:
a wide range of power from a single strip
Operator comfort: cushioned grip, reduced recoil
and sound dampening muffler for quiet operation
No manual resetting of piston required
Easy disassembly for cleaning and maintenance
SPECIFICATIONS:
Fastener Length: PTP-27ASX 12.7mm thru 38mm
PTP-27ASMAGR 12.7mm thru 32mm
Fastener Type: 8mm diameter
Firing Action: PTP-27ASX Automatic
PTP-27ASMAGR Fully automatic
Load Caliber: .27 strip loads,
brown through red (Levels 25)
Length: 381mm
Weight: PTP-27ASX 2.3kg
PTP-27ASMAGR 3.3kg
PTP-27ASX
Adjustable power
increases versatility
PTP-27ASMAGR

PTP-27ASX:
PTP-27ASMAGR:
Conduit clips
Drywall track
Ceiling clips
Hat channel
Drywall track
HVAC duct straps
Decking
TOOL IS SOLD IN A RUGGED TOOL BOX
COMPLETE WITH:
Operators manual
Spall suppressor
Tools for disassembly
Safety glasses / ear plugs
Cleaning brushes
Rotating magazine allows

for installation flexibility
Collated pins for fully

automatic fastening and
quick loading
The patent-pending quick-disconnect

baseplate makes it easy to convert the
PTP-27ASMAGR from a magazine to a
single shot tool
Common Repair Parts - PTP-27ASX

Description
Model No.
Baseplate
Nosepiece
Piston
Piston Disc
Rubber Returner
Regulator Cover Screw
Regulator Shock
Absorber Assembly
PTP-710051CH
PTP-710062CH
PTP-710072CH
PTP-730071CH
PTP-714008
PTP-BN11288
PTP-720061
1. Complete tool schematics and parts list

available at www.strongtie.com.
97
PT-27
General Purpose Tool
FEATURES:
Reliable design of the worlds most popular tool
Semi-automatic and fast cycling
Engineered for continuous use, high reliability
and low maintenance
SPECIFICATIONS:
Fastener Length: 12.7mm thru 63mm (76 or 102
washered)
Fastener Type: 8mm headed fasteners or "-20
threaded studs
Firing Action: Semi-automatic
Load Caliber: .27 strip loads,
brown through red (Levels 25)
Length: 343mm
Weight: 2.4kg
PT-27
TOOL IS SOLD IN A RUGGED TOOL BOX

COMPLETE WITH:
Operators manual
Spall suppressor
Tools for disassembly
Safety glasses / ear plugs
Cleaning brushes
Operators exam and caution sign
Common Repair Parts

Description
Model No.
Annular Spring
Ball Bearing (6mm)
Barrel
Baseplate
Piston - Concave
(includes ring)
Piston - Flat
(includes ring)
Piston Ring
Piston Stop
Shear Clip
PT-301014
PT-301013
PT-301006
PT-301009
PT-301217
PT-301903
PT-301208
PT-301012
PT-301011
1. Complete tool schematics and parts list

available at www.strongtie.com.
98

Acoustical ceilings
Electrical applications
Framing members
Drywall track
Water proofing material and/or lathing
POWDER LOADS & FASTENERS
For Simpson Strong-Tie Powder-Actuated Tools
.25 Caliber Plastic 10-Shot Strip Loads

Description
.25 Cal. - Green (Level 3)
.25 Cal. - Yellow (Level 4)
.25 Cal. - Red (Level 5)
Model
Pack
Qty.
P25SL3
P25SL4
P25SL5
100
100
100
Compatible Tools
Carton
Qty. Simpson
Others
Strong-Tie
10,000
10,000 PT-25S DX-35, R35S
10,000
P25SL
.27 Caliber Plastic 10-Shot Strip Loads

Description
Model
.27 Cal. - Yellow (Level 4)
.27 Cal. - Red (Level 5)
Compatible Tools
Pack Carton
Qty. Qty. Simpson Strong-Tie
Others
P27SL4
P27SL5
100
100
10,000 PTP-27
PTP-27AL
PTP-27ALMAGR
PTP-27ASX
PTP-27ASMAGR
10,000 PT-27
DX-350, DX-351, DX-36,

DX-A40 (except P27SL2),
DX-A41 (except P27SL2
and P27SL3), DX-460,
DX-450, DX-451,
System 1H, P-36B, A-40B,
A-41B, Cobra, and most .27
caliber clone tools.
P27SL
7.6mm (.3'') Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm (.157'') Shank Diameter

PDPA Drive Pins - For Structural Steel and Extra Hard Concrete
For A36 and A572 Grade 50 structural steel (red strip load recommended)
4mm (.157") diameter for greater compressive strength
Manufactured with tight tolerances for superior performance
Length
mm (in)
12.7 ()
12.7 () knurled
12.7 () knurled
16 () knurled
16 () knurled
19 ()
19 ()
Model
PDPA-50
PDPA-50K
PDPA-50KM
PDPA-62K
PDPA-62KM
PDPA-75
PDPA-75M
Pack Qty
100
100
1000
100
1000
100
1000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
Others
Carton Qty
1000
1000
5000
1000
5000
1000
5000
PTP-27, PTP-27AL,
PTP-27ASX, PT-27,
PT-25S, PT-27HD,
PTM-27HD
721**, D-60, U-2000,

System 1, System 3
and most other low
velocity tools.
PDPA
7.6mm (.3'') Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm (.145'') Shank Diameter

Length
mm (in)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
12.7 ()
12.7 () Knurled
16 () Knurled
19 ()
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
44.5 (1)
51 (2)
57 (2)
64 (2)
76 (3)
PDP-50
PDP-50K
PDP-62K
PDP-75
PDP-100
PDP-125
PDP-150
PDP-175
PDP-200
PDP-225
PDP-250
PDP-300
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27*
PTP-27AL*
PTP-27ASX**
PT-27*
PT-25S**
Others
721**, D-60,
U-2000,
System 1,
System 3 and
most other low
velocity tools.
PDP
*Up to 64mm, ** Up to 38mm
99
FASTENERS
7.6mm (.3") Headed Fasteners with 4.5mm (.177") Shank Diameter

Length
mm (in)
12.7 ()
12.7 () Knurled
16 () Knurled
19 ()
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
44.5 (1)
51 (2)
64 (2)
76 (3)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
PDPH-50
PDPH-50K
PDPH-62K
PDPH-75
PDPH-100
PDPH-125
PDPH-150
PDPH-175
PDPH-200
PDPH-250
PDPH-300
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27*
PTP-27AL*
PTP-27ASX**
PT-27*
PT-25S**
Others
721**, D-60,
U-2000,
System 1,
System 3 and
most other low
velocity tools.
PDPH
316 Stainless Steel 7.6mm (.3") Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm (.145") Shank Diameter
12.7 ()
12.7 () Knurled
16 () Knurled
19 ()
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
44.5 (1)
51 (2)
64 (2)
76 (3)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
PDP-50SS
PDP-50KSS
PDP-62KSS
PDP-75SS
PDP-100SS
PDP-125SS
PDP-150SS
PDP-175SS
PDP-200SS
PDP-250SS
PDP-300SS
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27*
PTP-27AL*
PTP-27ASX**
PT-27*
PT-25S**
Others
721**, D-60,
U-2000,
System 1,
System 3 and
most other low
velocity tools.
PDPSS
7.6mm (.3") Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm(.145")

Shank Diameter and 19mm (") Metal Washers
Length
mm (in)
Model
Pack Carton
Qty. Qty.
19 ()
PDPW-75
100
1,000
25 (1)
PDPW-100 100
1,000
32 (1) PDPW-125 100
1,000
38 (1) PDPW-150 100
1,000
51 (2)
PDPW-200 100
1,000
69 (2) PDPW-250 100
1,000
76 (3)
1,000
PDPW-300 100
Length
mm (in)
Compatible Tools
Simpson
Others
Strong-Tie
PTP-27
721*,
PTP-27AL
D-60,
PTP-27AS*
U-2000,
PTM-27
System 1,
PTM-22
System 3
PT-27
and most
PT-25S*
other low
PT-22
velocity
PT-22GS
tools.
PT-22H
7.6mm (.3") Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm (.145")

Shank Diameter and 25mm (1") Metal Washers
Compatible Tools
Pack Carton
Qty. Qty. Simpson
Others
Strong-Tie
25 (1)
PDPWL-100
100 1,000 PTP-27
721*,
100 1,000 PTP-27AL
32 (1) PDPWL-125
D-60,
100 1,000 PTP-27AS* U-2000,
38 (1) PDPWL-150
PTM-27
System 1,
51 (2)
PDPWL-200
100 1,000
PTM-22
System 3
100 1,000 PT-27
69 (2) PDPWL-250
and most
76 (3)
PDPWL-300
100 1,000 PT-25S*
other low
76 (3)
PDPWL-300M 1,000 PT-22
velocity
PT-22GS
tools.
102 (4) PDPWL-400
100 1,000 PT-22H
Length
mm (in)
PDPW
Model
PDPWL
*Up to 51mm
*Up to 51mm
Pre-Assembled Ceiling Clips 7.6mm (.3") Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm (.145") Shank Diameter
Description
Model
Compatible Tools
Pack Carton
Qty. Qty. Simpson Strong-Tie
Others
Compact Ceiling Clip - No Pin
PCL
100
1,000
Compact Ceiling Clip with 25.4mm (1") Pin
PECLDP-100
100
1,000
Compact Ceiling Clip with 32mm (1") Pin
PECLDP-125
100
Ceiling Clip with 25.4mm (1") Pin
PCLDP-100
100
Ceiling Clip with 32mm (1") Pin
PCLDP-125
100
PTP-27
PTP-27AL
1,000 PTP-27ASX
PT-27
1,000
PT-25S
1,000
DX-350,
System 1,
721 and
most other
tools.
PCLDP
(PCL similar
without pin)
PECLDP
100
FASTENERS
Metric Fasteners
8mm Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm Shank Diameter
Length
mm (in.)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
12.7() Knurled
16 () Knurled
19 () Knurled
22.4 ()
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
41 (1)
48 (1)
51 (2)
57 (2)
64 (2)
73 (2)
PHN-14K
PHN-16K
PHN-19K
PHN-22
PHN-27
PHN-32
PHN-37
PHN-42
PHN-47
PHN-52
PHN-57
PHN-62
PHN-72
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27*
PTP-27AL*
PTP-27ASX**
PTM-27
PT-27
PT-25S
PT-22
PT-22GS
PT-22H
Others
DX-350,
DX-36,
DX-400E,
DX-A40,
DX-460,
DX-A41,
System 1,
DX-351 and
8mm tools.
PHN
*Up to 64mm (2"),

**Up to 38mm (1")
8mm Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm Shank Diameter and 25mm (1") Metal Washers
Length
mm (in.)
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
41 (1)
48 (1)
51 (2)
57 (2)
64 (2)
73 (2)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
PHNW-27
PHNW-32
PHNW-37
PHNW-42
PHNW-47
PHNW-52
PHNW-57
PHNW-62
PHNW-72
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
Others
DX-350,
DX-36,
DX-400E,
DX-A40,
DX-A41,
DX-460,
System1,
DX-351 and
8mm tools.
PTP-27
PTP-27AL
PTP-27ASX*
PT-27
PT-25S*
PHNW
*Up to 51mm (2")
6mm Headed Fasteners with 3.7mm Shank Diameter and 12MM Washers
Length
mm (in.)
22.4 ()
25 (1)
32 (1)
38 (1)
41 (1)
51 (2)
64 (2)
73 (2)
Model
PHK-22
PHK-27
PHK-32
PHK-37
PHK-42
PHK-52
PHK-62
PHK-72
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible
Tools
DX-100L,
DX-300,
DX-400B,
DX-450,
DX-460,
DX-451 and
12mm tools.
PHK
8mm Headed Tophat Fasteners with 3.7mm Shank Diameter

Length
mm (in.)
16 () Knurled
19 () Knurled
22.4 ()
25 (1)
Model
Pack
Qty.
Carton
Qty.
PHNT-16K
PHNT-19K
PHNT-22
PHNT-27
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27, PTP-27AL
PTP-27ASX, PT-27
PT-25S.
Others
DX-35, DX-351,
and most
8mm tools.
PHNT
101
FASTENERS
Metric Fasteners (Continued)

Collated Fasteners - 8mm Headed with 3.7 MM Shank Diameter
Length
mm(in.)
Model
12 () Knurled
16 () Knurled
19 ()
19 () Knurled
22.4 ()
25 (1)
28 (1)
38 (1)
41 (1)
48 (1)
51 (2)
57 (2)
64 (2)
73 (2)
PHSNA-14K
PHSNA-16K
PHSNA-19
PHSNA-19K
PHSNA-22
PHSNA-27
PHSNA-32
PHSNA-37
PHSNA-42
PHSNA-47
PHSNA-52
PHSNA-57
PHSNA-62
PHSNA-72
Pack Carton
Qty.
Qty.
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Compatible Tools
Simpson Strong-Tie
PTP-27ASMAGR
(thru 32mm)
PTP-27ALMAGR
(thru 73mm)
Others
DX-A40 with
magazine,
DX-A41 with
magazine,
DX-351,
DX-460 with
magazine
PHSNA
Powder-Actuated Tool Repair and Maintenance Kits

Tool
102
Kit Model No.
Description
PTP-27AL
PTP-27ALPK1A
Normal wear
part replacement kit
PTP-27AL
PTP-27ALPK2A
Power regulator
rebuild kit
PT-27
PT-27PK1
Normal wear part

replacement kit
All
PT-MK1
Tool cleaning kit
Contents
1 Piston (Part No. PTP-730070CH)
1 Piston Disc (Part No. PTP-730071CH)
5 Rubber Returners (Part No. PTP-730008)
1 Regulator Bolt (Part No. PTP-914020)
1 Regulator Nut (Part No. PTP-914021)
1 Regulator Shock Absorber Assembly (Part No. PTP-720061)
1 Regulator Cover (Part No. PTP-914590)
2 Regulator Cover Screws (Part No. PTP-BN11288)
5 Shear Clips (Part No. PT-301011)
1 Annular Spring (Part No. PT-301014)
1 Piston Stop (Part No. PT-301012)
3 Ball Bearings (Part No. PT-301013)
1 Piston (Part No. PT-301903)
2 Piston Rings (Part No. PT-301208)
1 Nosepiece (Part No. PT-301010)
1 Cleaning Brush - Wire (Part No. BRUSH 125)
1 Cleaning Brush 19mm (") Diameter (Part No. BRUSH 25)
1 Cleaning Brush 6.4mm (") Diameter (Part No. BRUSH 75)
(1) 3.2mm (") Hex Wrench (Part No. MW-18)
(1) 4.8mm (") Hex Wrench (Part No. MW-316)
(1) 5mm Hex Wrench (Part No. MW-5)
NOTE: Lengths in metric are for reference only and may not be exact.
TENSION & SHEAR LOAD VALUES
For Simpson Strong-Tie Fasteners
Code Reports: Reference ICC-ES ESR-2138, Florida FL 11506.3 and City of L.A. RR25469 for code-listed fasteners and applications.
PDP Series Fasteners - Tension and Shear Loads in Normal-Weight Concrete
Allowable Tension Load 2 - kN (lbs.)
Allowable Shear Load 2 - kN (lbs.)
Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Model Diameter Penetration Edge Distance Spacing f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 20.7 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 20.7 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
(2000 psi)
(3000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(2000 psi)
(3000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
3.7
25
75
100
0.2
0.44
0.67
0.53
0.73
0.91
(0.145)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(45)
(100)
(150)
(120)
(165)
(205)
PDP
3.7
32
75
100
0.62
1.13
1.65
1.18
1.18
1.18
(0.145)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(140)
(255)
(370)
(265)
(265)
(265)
3.7
25
75
100
0.27
0.87
PDP-SS
(0.145)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(60)
(195)
1. The fasteners shall not be driven until the concrete has reached the designated compressive strength.
Minimum concrete thickness is three times the fastener embedment into the concrete.
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for the fastener only. Wood or steel members connected
must be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria.
PDP & PDP-SS
PDPW
The table applies to the following

Simpson Strong-Tie fasteners where
minimum penetration exists:
PDP*
PDPW*
PDPWL*
PDP-125
PDP-150
PDP-175
PDP-200
PDP-225
PDP-250
PDP-300
PDPW-125
PDPW-150
PDPW-175
PDPW-200
PDPW-225
PDPW-250
PDPW-300
PDPWL-125
PDPWL-150
PDPWL-175
PDPWL-200
PDPWL-225
PDPWL-250
PDPWL-300
PDPWL-400
PDPWL & PDPWL-SS
*Including
stainless
steel models.
PHN Series Fasteners - Tension and Shear Loads in Normal-Weight Concrete

Allowable Tension Load 2 - kN (lbs.)
Allowable Shear Load 2 - kN (lbs.)
Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Model Diameter Penetration Edge Distance Spacing f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 20.7 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 20.7 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
(2000 psi)
(3000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(2000 psi)
(3000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
3.7
25
75
100
0.2
0.44
0.67
0.53
0.73
0.91
(0.145)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(45)
(100)
(150)
(120)
(165)
(205)
PHN
3.7
32
75
100
0.62
1.13
1.65
1.18
1.18
1.18
(0.145)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(140)
(255)
(370)
(265)
(265)
(265)
The table applies to the following
Simpson Strong-Tie fasteners where
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for the fastener only. Wood or steel members connected
minimum penetration exists:
must be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria.
PHN
PHNW
PHSNA
Spacing of PDP and PHN Fasteners for Attachment of

Wood Sill Plates to Normal-Weight Concrete
Model
No.
Overall Head
Shank
Length Diameter Diameter
mm
mm
mm
(inches) (inches) (inches)
PDPW-300
PDPWL-300
76
PDPWL-300MG
(3)
PDPWLS-300MG
PHN-72
73
or
(2)
PHNW-72
Maximum Spacing
mm
(inches)
Interior
Interior
Exterior
Shear Walls 3 Nonshear Walls 2 Shear Walls 3
7.9
()
3.7
(0.145)
305
(12)
610
(24)
305
(12)
7.9
()
3.7
(0.145)
457
(18)
914
(36)
457
(18)
PHN
PHNW
PHSNA
PHN-27
PHN-32
PHN-37
PHN-42
PHN-47
PHN-52
PHN-57
PHN-62
PHN-72
PHNW-27
PHNW-32
PHNW-37
PHNW-42
PHNW-47
PHNW-52
PHNW-57
PHNW-62
PHNW-72
PHSNA-27
PHSNA-32
PHSNA-37
PHSNA-42
PHSNA-47
PHSNA-52
PHSNA-57
PHSNA-62
PHSNA-72
1. Spacings are based upon the attachment of 51mm (2") (nominal

thickness) wood sill plates, with specific gravity of 0.50 or
greater, to concrete floor slabs or footings. For species of wood
with specific gravity of 0.42 to 0.49, multiply required spacing of
fasteners for shear walls by 0.81. For species of wood with specific
gravity of 0.31 to 0.41, multiply the required spacing of fasteners
for shear walls by 0.65.
2. All walls shall have fasteners placed at 6 inches from ends of sill
plates, with maximum spacing as shown in the table.
3. Fasteners indicated shall have two pins placed 152mm (6") and
254mm (10"), respectively, from each end of sill plates, with
maximum spacing as shown in the table.
4. All fasteners must be installed with a minimum 19mm (")
diameter, No. 16 gauge 1.52mm (0.06") steel washer.
5. Fasteners shall not be driven until the concrete has reached a
compressive strength of 13.8MPa (2,000 psi). Minimum edge
distance is 45mm (1").
6. The fasteners shall not be used for the attachment of shear walls
having a unit shear in excess of 45kg (100 pounds) per 13cm.
Spacings shown are independent of the number of building stories.
103
PDPH Series Fasteners - Tension and Shear Loads

in Normal Weight Concrete
Allowable Tension Load - kN (lbs.)
Allowable Shear Load - kN (lbs.)
Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Diameter Penetration Edge Distance Spacing f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa f'c 41.4 MPa f'c 13.8 MPa f'c 27.6 MPa f'c 41.4 MPa
mm
mm
mm
mm
(2000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(6000 psi)
(2000 psi)
(4000 psi)
(6000 psi)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
19
89
130
0.13
0.13
0.29
0.22
0.49
0.84
()
(3)
(5)
(30)
(30)
(110)
(50)
(110)
(190)
4.5
(0.177)
32
89
130
0.58
1.15
0.84
1.18
0.98
0.47
(1)
(3)
(5)
(130)
(260)
(190)
(265)
(220)
(105)
Model
No.
PDPH
PDPH
2. The allowable tension values are for the fastener only. Connected members must be
investigated separately in accordance with accepted design criteria.
Model
No.
PDP
PHN
PDP
PHN
Allowable Shear Load

Shank
Minimum
Light Gauge
kN (lbs.)
Diameter Penetration Steel Channel
mm
mm
Thickness
f'c 13.8 MPa (2000 psi) 1. The fasteners shall
(inches)
(inches)
gauge
not be driven until
Concrete
the concrete has
0.71
3.7
22
20 (1mm)
reached the
(160)
(0.145)
()
designated
3.7
22
0.71
compressive
20 (1mm)
(0.145)
()
(160)
strength. Minimum
3.7
22
0.60
concrete thickness
18 (1.3mm)
(0.145)
()
(135)
is three times the
faster embedment
3.7
22
0.60
18 (1.3mm)
into the concrete.
(0.145)
()
(135)
PDP
PHN
PCLDP Series Ceiling Clips - Tension Loads

in Normal Weight Concrete
Model
No.
Shank
Diameter
mm
(inches)
Minimum
Penetration
mm
(inches)
PCLDP-125
3.7
(0.145)
28
(1)
Allowable Tension Load

kN (lbs.)
f'c 13.8 MPa (2000 psi)
Concrete
0.11
(25)
1. The fasteners shall not be

driven until the concrete has
reached the designated
compressive strength.
Minimum concrete thickness
is three times the faster
embedment into the concrete.
PCLDP
PCL & PECL Series Ceiling Clips - Tension and Oblique Loads
in Sand-Lightweight Concrete over Metal Deck
Model
No.
Shank
Minimum
mm
mm
(inches)
(inches)
Allowable Tension Load, kN (lbs.)

(Installed through Metal Deck)
Allowable Oblique Load, kN (lbs.)

f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)

Concrete
f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)

Concrete
PCLDP-100
3.7
(0.145)
22
()
0.24
(55)
0.38
(85)
PECLDP-125
3.7
(0.145)
25
(1)
0.24
(55)
0.38
(85)
PCLDP-125
3.7
(0.145)
25
(1)
0.24
(55)
0.38
(85)
PECLHN-27
3.7
(0.145)
25
(1)
0.24
(55)
0.38
(85)
PCLHN-27
3.7
(0.145)
25
(1)
0.24
(55)
0.38
(85)
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for the fastener only. Connected members must be
investigated separately in accordance with accepted design criteria.
3. Metal deck must be minimum 20 gauge (1mm).
4. Oblique values are for loads applied toward edge of flute.
5. The fasteners shall be installed 38mm (1") from the edge of flute.
104
PCLDP
PECLDP
PDP and PHN Fasteners Attaching Light Gauge Steel

Channels - Shear Loads in Normal Weight Concrete
PHNT Series Fasteners - Tension Loads in Sand-Lightweight

Concrete Over Metal Deck
Shank
Minimum Allowable Tension Load, kN (lbs.) Allowable Tension Load, kN (lbs.)
(Installed in Concrete)
Model Diameter Penetration
No.
mm
mm
f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)
f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)
(inches)
(inches)
Concrete
Concrete
3.7
22
0.82
0.73
PHNT
(0.145)
()
(185)
(165)
See notes 15 below.
PHNT Series Fasteners - Shear Loads in Sand-Lightweight

Concrete Over Metal Deck
Shank
Minimum
Model Diameter Penetration
No.
mm
mm
(inches)
(inches)
PHNT
3.7
(0.145)
22
()
Allowable Shear Load, kN (lbs.)

(Installed in Concrete)
Allowable Shear Load, kN (lbs.)

f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)

Concrete
1.22
(275)
f'c 20.7 MPa (3000 psi)

Concrete
1.78
(400)
PHNT
1. The fasteners shall not be driven until the concrete has reached the designated
compressive strength. Minimum concrete thickness is three times the fastener
embedment into the concrete.
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for the fastener only. Connected members
must be investigated separately in accordance with accepted design criteria.
3. Metal deck must be minimum 20 gauge (1mm).
4. Shear values are for loads applied toward edge of flute.
5. The fasteners shall be installed 38mm (1") from the edge of flute.
PHNT Series Fasteners - Tension and Shear Loads in Steel

Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Steel
Allowable
Allowable
Model Diameter Edge Distance Spacing Thickness 3 Tension Load 2 Shear Load 2
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
kN
kN
(inches)
(inches)
(inches) (inches)
(lbs.)
(lbs.)
PHNT
3.7
(0.145)
12.7
()
25
(1)
3
()
5
()
6
()
0.18
(40)
0.22
(50)
1.11
(250)
1.96
(440)
2.76
(620)
2.76
(620)
1. The entire pointed portion of the fastener must penetrate through

the steel to obtain the tabulated value. See Detail A.
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for the fastener to steel only.
3. Steel must conform to ASTM A36 specifications, with Fy = 262 MPa, minimum.
PDP Tension and Shear Loads in 200mm (8") Lightweight,

Medium-Weight and Normal-Weight Hollow CMU
200mm (8") Hollow CMU
Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum Loads Based on CMU Strength
Model Diameter Penetration Edge Distance End Distance Spacing
Tension Load
Shear Load
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Allowable
Allowable
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
kN (lbs.)
kN (lbs.)
3.7
44
100
116
100
0.60
1.07
PDP
(0.145)
(1)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(135)
(240)
1. Values for 200mm (8") wide CMU Grade N, Type II, lightweight, 3. Allowable loads may not be increased for short-term
medium-weight and normal weight concrete masonry units
loading due to wind or seismic forces. CMU wall
conforming to UBC Standard 21-4 or ASTM C90.
design must satisfy applicable design standards
2. The embedment depth is measured from the outside face of
and be capable of withstanding applied loads.
the concrete masonry unit and is based on the anchor being
4. Allowable loads are based on a safety factor of 5.0.
embedded an additional 12mm(") through 32mm(1") thick
face shell.
PDP
105
PDP Series Fasteners Tension and Shear Loads in Steel

Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Steel
Allowable
Allowable
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
kN
kN
(inches)
(inches)
(inches) (inches)
(lbs.)
(lbs.)
PDP
PDP
Knurled
3.7
(0.145)
3.7
(0.145)
12.7
()
12.7
()
25
(1)
25
(1)
4.8
()
6.4
()
0.69
(155)
0.93
(210)
1.76
(395)
See
notes
below.
PDPH Series Fasteners Tension and Shear Loads in Steel

Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Steel
Allowable
Allowable
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
kN
kN
(inches)
(inches)
(inches) (inches)
(lbs.)
(lbs.)
4.5
(0.177)
12.7
()
25
(1)
1. The entire pointed portion of the fastener

must penetrate through the steel to obtain
the tabulated values. See Detail A.
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for
the fastener to steel only. Connected members
must be investigated separately in accordance
with accepted design criteria.
3. Steel must conform to ASTM A36 specifications,
with Fy = 262 MPa, minimum.
Detail A
4.8
()
6.4
()
1.49
(335)
2.31
(520)
PDPH
PDPWL
PDPW
PHN
PHNW
3.51
(790)
3.87
(870)
The table applies to the following Simpson Strong-Tie

fasteners where minimum penetration exists:
PDP
PDPW
PDPWL
PDP-50K
PDP-62K
PDP-100
PDP-125
PDP-150
PDP-175
PDP-200
PDP-225
PDP-250
PDP-300
PDPW-100
PDPW-125
PDPW-150
PDPW-175
PDPW-200
PDPW-250
PDPW-300
PDPWL-100
PDPWL-125
PDPWL-150
PDPWL-175
PDPWL-200
PDPWL-250
PDPWL-300
PDPH
PDP
PHN Series Fasteners Tension and Shear Loads in Steel

Shank
Minimum
Minimum
Steel
Allowable
Allowable
No.
mm
mm
mm
mm
kN
kN
(inches)
(inches)
(inches) (inches)
(lbs.)
(lbs.)
PHN
PHN 4
Knurled
3.7
(0.145)
3.7
(0.145)
12.7
()
12.7
()
25
(1)
25
(1)
1. The entire pointed portion of the fastener

must penetrate through the steel to obtain the
tabulated values. See Detail A.
2. The allowable tension and shear values are for
the fastener into steel only. Wood members
connected must be investigated separately in
accordance with accepted design criteria.
3. Steel must conform to ASTM A 36 specifications,
with Fy = 262 MPa, minimum.
4. PHN-16K or longer.
POWDER ACTUATED
FASTENER
Detail A
106
4.8
()
6.4
()
0.69
(155)
2.0
(440)
1.76
(395)
The table applies to the following Simpson

Strong-Tie fasteners where minimum
penetration exists:
PHN
PHNW
PHSNA
PHN-16K
PHN-19K
PHN-27
PHN-32
PHN-37
PHN-42
PHN-47
PHN-52
PHN-57
PHN-62
PHN-72
PHNW-27
PHNW-32
PHNW-37
PHNW-42
PHNW-47
PHNW-52
PHNW-57
PHNW-62
PHNW-72
PHSNA-16K
PHSNA-19K
PHSNA-27
PHSNA-32
PHSNA-37
PHSNA-42
PHSNA-47
PHSNA-52
PHSNA-57
PHSNA-62
PHSNA-72
PHSNA
OTHER PRODUCTS
Wood Construction Connectors:
Includes specifications, load
tables and fastener schedules
for over 3,000 connectors.
Application drawings are provided
to clarify installation. Wood-to
wood, wood-to concrete and
wood-to-masonry connections
included.
Cold-Formed Steel Connectors:

We offer a full line of connectors
for use in cold-formed steel
framing. Our products have been
developed specifically for light
steel applications and tested
using commonly used fasteners.
Fastening Systems
When you need a fastener that
does more; we offer a broad
range of solutions that offer
higher loads or extra corrosion
resistance or an installation
method that saves time and
money. These premium fastening
products have features that
ensure a successful result for
almost any application.
See www.strongtie.com for complete information on these

products and systems or contact your local Simpson branch.
107
Safer,
Building
Stronger Structures
Wood Connectors
www.sstrongtie.com
108
WOOD CONSTRUCTION CONNECTORS
Roof Ties
H2A & H10A
Hurricane Ties for Uplift Conditions

When Tying Roof Rafters to Top Plates
Roof ties attach to the stud and top plate providing a continuous load
path from the rafter/truss to the stud.
Floor Joist Hangers
ITS
Top Flange Hangers for Engineered Wood I-Joist beams
The innovative ITS sets the new standard for engineered wood top
flange hangers. The ITS installs faster and uses fewer nails than any
other I-joist top flange hanger. The Strong-Grip seat and Funnel
Flange features allow standard joist installation without requiring joist
nails resulting in cost savings. The Strong-Grip seat firmly secures the
I-joist flange with no nails.
Foundation Holdowns
HDU14
Holdown for post and column anchoring
The HDU series of holdowns is our highest capacity HDU holdown

yet. Like the rest of the HDU line, the pre-deflected geometry virtually
eliminates deflection due to material stretch. Install using Simpson SDS
screws which fasten easily and reduce fastener slip. The HDU14 can be
installed flush with the sill plate or raised off of the plate.
Decking & Pergola Bases
ABA/ABU
Post Bases
Adjustable post bases which offer moisture protection and finished

hardware appearance. These post bases feature 25mm standoff height
above concrete floors, required when supporting permanent structures
that are exposed to the weather or water splash. This reduces the potential
for decay at post and column ends.
Available in corrosion resistant steel suitable for outdoor use.
109
FASTENERS
STRENGTH
Comes in Numbers
Cold-Formed
Steel Connectors
www.sttrongtiee.com
110
COLD-FORMED STEEL CONNECTORS
Roof Ties
H2A
Hurricane Tie
This new H2A hurricane tie offers high uplift capacity.
STC and DTC
Truss Clips
The STC and DTC single and double truss clips provide alignment control
between the roof truss and non-bearing walls. The 38mm slot allows for
vertical truss displacement when loads are applied.
H2A
STC and DTC
Floor Joist Hangers
S/JCT
Steel Joist Hangers
New, improved, higher load-capacity joist hangers. Additional fasteners

in the new S/JCT and the increased thickness of the S/HJCT increase the
allowable load capacity for use with C-Joists. Joist can be attached from
either side or doubled up. This hanger can be used with either steel or
wood headers.
S/BA
Cold-Formed Steel Hanger
The S/BA top-flange hanger is a cost-effective alternative to heavier,

special-order hangers. The S/BA is value engineered and tested to
achieve higher allowable loads and increased performance. It may be
fastened with screws or powder-actuated fasteners or welded to the
header, providing more design options and greater versatility.
S/DTT2Z
Tension Tie
The S/DTT2Z is a cost effective tension tie (holdown) that is commonly

used for cold-formed steel stud shear walls. It is intended for shear walls
that have low overturning moment demand.
Foundation Holdowns
S/HTT4
Heavy Duty Tension Ties
The HTT series of tension ties offers tension-resisting solutions that

install with screws. HTTs feature an optimized fastener pattern which
results in excellent performance with less deflection.
111
QUIK DRIVE COLLATED FASTENER SYSTEM
Simpson Strong-Tie Quik Drive offers labor and time saving autofeed systems and specialty fasteners engineered for a wide range
of commercial and residential construction applications.
Gypsum Board
Fiberglass-Backed Gypsum Sheathing
Deck and Dock

Subfloor, Sheathing, Wall
Plates and Stair Treads
Composite Deck
Concrete and
Ceramic Tile Roofing
Steel
See www.strongtie.com
for more information
AUTO-FEED SCREW DRIVING SYSTEMS
QUIK DRIVE FASTENERS
These systems offer several easy-to-use attachments bringing speed and

reliability to applications that require the fastening power of screws.
Our attachments provide tough, reliable performance in specific
fastening applications.
Featuring patented collation technology, Quik Drive fasteners

are designed to meet or exceed industry standards for strength
and longevity while offering easy-to-load, tangle-free strips
for efficient performance in auto-feed systems.
For more information visit www.strongtie.com
112
Fiber Cement Backerboard &

Composite Underlayment
SPECIALTY FASTENERS
Simpson Strong-Tie is committed to providing the outdoor construction industry with stainless-steel and non-ferrous fasteners
of excellent durability and reliability. Custom builders everywhere
have come to count on Simpson for quality nails, screws and a
host of specialized fastening solutions to withstand the tests of
time and the elements not uncommonly outlasting even the best
of building materials.
See www.strongtie.com
for more information.
Decking
EBTY Hidden
Deck Tie
Siding
Roofing
Framing
Finishing,
Millwork &
Trim
Composites &
Fiberglass
Steel Framing
Unique Fastener Products

As manufacturers of building materials continue to produce increasingly exotic and
specialized products, we stand by our commitment to engineering and marketing
innovative fastener solutions for todays and tomorrows most demanding
construction applications.
113
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Simpson Strong-Tie Company introduces a new range of systems

used in reinforcement/restoration of concrete structures including
commercial, tunnel, historical buildings and infrastructure projects.
Materials for the FRP strengthening of reinforced concrete structures and of reinforced bituminous pavements. Additionally, reinforcement
systems to control soil erosion, for rock support and for dam construction are offered.
114
Contact Simpson for more details.
CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS
Simpson Strong-Tie Company introduces innovative solutions

for concrete restoration and repair. Used in the marine, industrial,
transportation, commercial building and public works industries,
this complete line features epoxy, urethane, acrylic, polyester and
cementitious materials.
Marine Column Strengtening System
Sprayable primer/ polyurea system used

in bio-hazard room protection.
Contact Simpson for more details.
System used to restore a bridge
System used in restoration of a historic

building.
System used in exterior restoration
115
C-- A
C
APACME
PA
PACM
ACM
A
CME -2012
--2
201
0012
122 22012
00112 SI
SIMP
SIM
S
SIMPSON
IM
MP
PSO
SO
ON
N STRO
STRONG-TIE
TR
RO
ONG-T
N TIE
Project
Referrals
116
11
116
16
MECHANICAL ANCHORS
Superplus Undercut Anchor
England- London
Old Stock Exchange Building
Used in building renovation
Slovenia
Used in fixture installation in tunnel
Germany- Troisdorf
Used in silo anchoring
Germany
Crane anchoring
Superplus
Self-undercut Anchor
The universal anchor for

professional and efficient fixing
without special tools.
Ultraplus Preloaded Anchor
Europe North Sea

Used in oil derrick
Germany Brusbttel
Used in Power Plant anchoring
Germany
Equipment anchoring
Germany
Used in Nuclear Power Plant
Ultraplus Preloaded Anchor

Safe fixing with mechanical
interlock anchoring. "Positive
undercutting" allows perfect bearing
of the segments and ensures
reliable transmission of the load
into the concrete.
When the ultimate in safety and
strength is required.
117
MECHANICAL ANCHORS
Titen HD Screw Anchor
China- Beijing
Olympic Velodrome Stadium
Roof structure anchoring
China- Tianjin Railway

Power Supply Fixing
China- Beijing
Steel structure anchoring
USA- California
Factory machinery anchoring
USA- California
Oakland International Airport
Lifting slabs in runway repair
UAE- Dubai
Metro Rail System
THD & ET used in stations
The Titen HD anchor is a patented,

high-strength screw anchor
for concrete and masonry. It is
designed for optimum performance
in both cracked and uncracked
concrete. Meets ASTM standard for
vibration resistance.
Specialized heat treating process

creates superior surface hardness,
while the anchor body remains
ductile. This results in the Titen
HD bending instead of breaking
when exposed to forces above the
ultimate load.
China- Guilin
Highway
118
China- Beijing
Subway cassion anchoring
Titen HD Screw Anchor
STRUCTURAL ADHESIVES
Formulas to
meet any need
Epoxy-Tie Anchoring Adhesive
China- Beijing
Worker's Olympic Stadium
Renovation work
Indian Ocean- Seychelles Islands

Marine Conservation Society
Adhesion of electronic monitoring
devices to endangered sea turtles
USA- California
Ferry Building
Renovation and seismic upgrade of
historic structure
USA- Califonia
San Francisco-Oakland Bay Bridge
Seismic upgrade
USA- Missouri
Poplar Street Bridge
Seismic upgrade
China- Beijing-Shanghai
High Speed Rail
Track Plate Fixing
USA- Texas
Ellington Airfield
Airport runway extension
UAE- Dubai
Elite Tower
Dowelling of floors to core wall
ET Epoxy-Tie
Anchoring Adhesive
ET Epoxy-Tie is an economical
two-component, high solids, epoxy
based system for use as a highstrength, non-shrink anchoring and
grouting material.
Meets
AC308
308
SET-XP
SET-XP is a 1:1 two component,
high solids epoxy-based anchoring
adhesive formulated for optimum
performance in both cracked and
uncracked concrete.
119
120
UAE- Dubai
Jumeriah Heights
General dowelling
Thailand- Hua Hin

Intercontinental Hotel
Wet hole rebar installation
Qatar- Doha
Doha Tower
China- Haerbin-Dalian
High Speed Rail
Wind Barrier Fixing
Qatar
Las Raffan Gas plant
Dowelling of foundations
Taiwan- Tachia River Bridge

Seismic reinforcement
Qatar- Doha
Dubai Tower
USA- California
Tujunga Dam
Seismic Upgrade
Qatar- Doha
New Doha International Airport
General dowelling for hangers and
terminals
UAE- Abu Dhabi

ET22 used in Yas Island Ferrari Building
at Abu Dhabi F1 race track
Thailand- Bangkok
ET22 used in Airport rail link
Track and general anchoring
Thailand- Bangkok
IRR Elevated Highway
Rebar dowelling
China- Hebei
Qinhuangdao
Caisson tube anchoring
China- Tianjin
Highway sound barrier anchoring
China- Tianjin
Highway crash barrier anchoring
China- Tianjin
Seaport
Damp condition fender anchoring
China- Shandong
Seaport
Loading arm, equipment anchoring
China- Henan
Seaport
Fender, mooring, railing large diameter
anchoring
China- Liaoning
Seaport
Damp condition large diameter fender
anchoring
China- Henan
Seismic upgrade of bridge
China- Hebei
China- Tianjin
Factory equipment anchoring
China- Beijing
CCTV Building
Used in steel anchoring
China- Beijing
Albemarle Building
Renovation work
121
AT-HP high strength fast cure anchoring adhesive
California- San Diego

AT Used in dowelling for column
enlargement
Canada- Prince Edward Island

Confederation Bridge
Below freezing temperature installation
122
USA- Illinois
Wintertime highway repair
USA- Wisconsin
University of Wisconsin
Stadium seating installation
USA- New York

Oak Pointe Railroad Bridge
Bridge and track renovation
China- Tianjin
Seaport
Berth renovation
China- Tianjin
Steel anchoring
USA- California
Federal Emergency Management Agency
Rescue drill for quick lifting
AT-HP is formulated for use in all

types of weather, AT is designed
to dispense easily and cure at
temperatures down to 0. Fast
30 minute cure at 21.
(Formerly called AT)
AT-HP Fast Cure Anchoring

Adhesive
China- Beijing
Sanlitun SOHO Building
Structural anchoring
China- Harbin
High speed railway anchoring
China- Shandong
Railway bridge renovation
China- Hebei
Seaport
Winter time equipment anchoring
China- Beijing
Wintertime bridge repair
China- Tianjin
China- Beijing
Fixture anchoring in hollow block wall with screen tube system
China- Tianjin
Winter time and wet weather anchoring
China- Shandong
High Speed railway Line, Addition of electrical line poles
China- Tianjin
Light rail anchoring
123
OTHER PRODUCTS
ETI Crack Injection Structural Repair Epoxy
China- Gansu
Bridge renovation and structural crack
repair
USA- California
Structural crack repair of large
swimming pool
Pacific Islands- Guam

Charterhouse condominium
Structural crack repair
USA- San Francisco, CA

Honda car dealer structural floor repair
above and below crack surface
Structural crack repair in concrete

does not have to require expensive
equipment or mixing. This system
is easy to use with no waste. Meets
ASTM C881 requirements for
structural strength.
VGC & KLP Chemical Anchoring Adhesive
China- Beijing
KLP used in curtain wall installation
China- Beijing
KLP used in curtain wall installation
KLP Chemical Capsule Anchor

For installation with reduced edge
distances and center spacings, or
use in concrete of low or questionable compressive strength.
Germany
KLP used to anchor warehouse racking
124
China- Beijing
KLP used in curtain wall anchoring
ETI Injection Epoxy
OTHER PRODUCTS
Crack-Pac Flex H2O Polyurethane Injection Adhesive
Crack-Pac
Flex H2O
Polyurethane
Injection Adhesive
Flexible crack sealer
Expands to fill cracks and voids
For dry, wet and actively leaking
cracks
Single tube product can dispense
with a standard caulking tool
China- Beijing
Damp condition leak repair
U.S.A.- California
Moving crack leak repair
Mechanical Anchors
Drop-In Anchors
U.S.A.- California
Stainless steel wedge anchors in water
treatment facility
U.S.A.- New York

City parking garage
Drop Ins used in interior mechanical
work
Strong-BoltTM
Wedge Anchor
The Strong-Bolt is a
wedge anchor specifically
designed for optimum
performance in both
cracked and uncracked
concrete.
Drop-in Anchor
Drop-in anchors are
internally-threaded,
deformation-controlled
expansion anchors with a
preassembled expander
plug, suitable for flush
mount applications in
solid base materials.
Gas Tool Fastening System
Powder-Actuated Fastening
System
GCN150 Gas-Tool
Egypt- Cairo
Madinati Project
Gas nailer for lathing fastening
PTP-27ASMAGR
Tool
PTP
27ASMAGR To
UAE- Dubai
Dubai Mall
P.A.T. system used for interior
finishing work
125
SIMPSON STRONG-TIE PRODUCT SOLUTIONS

Wood Construction Connectors and Lateral Systems
U.S.A.- California
Multi-story timber structure using wood
connectors and Anchor Tiedown System
Japan- Kobe
NEES wood earthquake test
Connectors and Anchor Tiedown System
used in 7 story full size wood structure
Simpson Strong-Tie connectors

that are engineered/designed for
light gauge steel framing.
U.S.A.- Hawaii
CFS connectors in housing development
UAE- Abu Dhabi

CFS connectors in villa development
When speed, efficiency and a high

quality finish are needed- this is the
system for metal roofing, timber
framing, decking, steel framing,
gypsum board.
Quik Drive
Simpson Strong-Tie
Fasteners
With stainless
Australia- Phillip Island

Warrandale Park Boardwalk
Quik Drive timber deck fastening
system provided an economic high
quality finish
126
Quik Drive auto feed

systems
Without stainless
Tanzania- Serrengeti National Park

Simpson Strong-Tie stainless-steel
screws used in resort deck
Simpson Strong-Tie
Fasteners
When the best quality fasteners are

required.
Cold-Formed Steel Connectors
TESTING REPORTS
Test report
Certification Authority
ETA
European Technical Approvals
GB50367-2006
Design Code for Strengthening Concrete Structure
JGJ145-2004
Technical Specification for Post-Installed Fastenings

in Concrete Structures
IBC2009
International Building Code
ICC-ES
International Code Council Evaluation Service
ACI
American Concrete Institute
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
CAMA
Concrete Anchor Manufacturers' Association
City of L.A.
City of L.A Building And Safety Commissioners
Florida FL
Florida Department of Community Affairs
NSF/ANSI
The Public Health and Safety Company
LEED
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
H&B
Singapore Housing & Development Board
Logo
127
ANCHOR SELECTION SOFTWARE
Anchor Selector Software for ETAG

Anchor Selector for ETAG
software helps Designers
decipher the most
appropriate cracked- and
noncracked-concrete anchor
solutions among numerous
Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor
Systems mechanical and
adhesive anchors. With its easy-to-use graphical
interface, Anchor Selector software for ETAG
accelerates the design process by eliminating the
need for tedious calculations by hand that would
otherwise be necessary to determine crackedconcrete anchor solutions.
For applications where ACI 318

doesn't apply, we still have the
original Anchor Designer
for Allowable Stress Design
Software. We'll continue to
keep this program updated with
the latest technical information so
it can continue to be a valuable tool
for anchor specification.
Simpson Strong-Tie Liebig Heavy-Duty Mechanical Anchors

Ultraplus Undercut Anchor
for exceptionally high loads
Superplus Self-undercut Anchor
no special setting tools required
Safety Bolt
heavy sleeve anchor with two expansion cones
Anchor Bolt
heavy sleeve anchor for all standard applications
Boa-X Wedge Bolt
economic standard through-bolt
Chemical Anchors
for reduced edge distances and spacings
The programs make it easy to select the correct anchorage for your application
and available for FREE download from www.strongtie.com
128
Anchor Designer for Allowable Stress Design
NOTES
129
NOTES
130
NOTES
131
Every day we work hard to earn your business,

blending the talents of our people with the
quality of our products and services to exceed
your expectations. This is our pledge to you.
Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd.

3/F Cambridge House, #301
Taikoo Place, 979 Kings Road
Quarry Bay, Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 3511 1888
Fax:(852) 3511 1889
Gulf States Warehouse & Office
Warehouse No.RA07AB08, LIU 15
Street 710, Round About No. 7
Jebel Ali Free Zone
P.O.Box 262983 Jebel Ali
Dubai, UAE.
Tel: (971) 4 8702 100
Fax: (971) 4 8870 727
Simpson Strong-Tie (Beijing) Co., Ltd.
Suite 2609, GoldenTower, No. 1 Xibahe Road (S)
Chaoyang District, Beijing 100028, China
Tel: (86) 10 6440 3840
Asia Manufacturing Facility
No.10 Nanyuan Road South Area of
Economic Development Zone Zhangjiagang
Jiangsu Province 215600, China
www.strongtie.asia
www.strongtie.com
C-APACME-2012, Effective 4/1/12, Expires 4/30/13

2012 All Rights Reserved by Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd.

C Apacme 2012

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

C Apacme 2012

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

In the Specs On the Job At Your Service

QUICK FACTS ABOUT SIMPSON STRONG-TIE

1956 in Oakland, California, U.S.A.

Home Office U.S.A

Employees Approximately 2,500 employees world-wide

Factories, offices, and warehouses in

Distribution in Australia, Canada, Chile,

Web sites www.strongtie.com; www.strongtie.asia

Every day we work hard to earn your business,

WE ARE ISO 9001-2000 REGISTERED

C- APACME -2012 2012 SIMPSON STRONG-TIE

C- APACME -2012 2012 SIMPSON STRONG-TIE

AT-HPTM Adhesive ..............................................30-34

Blue Banger Hanger ................................................ 66

Adhesive Accessories ........................................35-36

BOAX-II Expansion Anchor ................................57-61

Adhesive Anchoring Installation Instructions .... 1516

Drop-In Anchor ..................................................62-64

Crack Injection Guide .............................................. 43

HWA Hollow Wall Anchors ...................................... 70

Crack-Pac Flex H2O ............................................. 44

Crack-Pac Flex H2O Method Statement ..........45-46

NailonTM Pin Drive Anchors ..................................... 69

Crack Repair Accessories........................................ 47

Safety Bolt......................................................... 8288

Crack Repair Method Statement ............................. 42

Sleeve All Anchor .................................................... 65

ET Epoxy-Tie Adhesive .....................................18-22

Superplus Undercut Anchor .............................. 7781

ETI-LV and -GV Crack Injection Adhesives .............. 41

Titen HD Anchor .............................................. 4952

Epoxy-Tie Usage Estimation Guides ...................... 28

Titen Concrete and Masonry Screws .............................. 67

KLP Chemical Capsule .......................................37-38

Titen Stainless-Steel Concrete and Masonry Screws ........... 68

RFB Threaded Stud ................................................. 39

Torq-Cut Anchor ................................................... 53

SET-XP Adhesive .............................................23-27

Wedge Anchor Throughbolt WA ....................... 5456

Ultraplus Undercut Anchor.................................72-76

GCN150 Gas-Actuated Concrete Nailer System .............95-96

Allowable Stress Design Method............................. 10

Powder Loads ......................................................... 99

Design Software.................................................... 128

PT-27 General Purpose Tool ................................... 98

General Instructions for the Designer ....................... 6

Project Referrals ............................................116-126

Cold Formed Steel Connectors .......................110-111

Supplemental Topics for Anchors ..........................6-8

Concrete Reinforcement ....................................... 114

Table Icons ............................................................... 4

Construction Chemicals ........................................ 115

Testing Reports..................................................... 127

Quik Drive Collated Fastener System ................... 112

Treatment of Design Methods ............................13-14

Specialty Fasteners ............................................... 113

Strength Design Method ....................................10-12

Wood Connectors ..........................................108-109

IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND GENERAL NOTES

Non-catalog products must be designed by the customer and will be

SPECIAL ORDER PRODUCTS

NON-CATALOG AND MODIFIED PRODUCTS

Simpson Strong-Tie Asia Ltd. warrants catalog products to be free from